Preface
Contents
Overview
Machine Features
Color and Image Quality Functions
- Basic Color Modes
- Adjusting Image Quality and Color
Guides Provided with the Machine
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- Structure of the guide
- Conventions Used in This Guide
Menu Map
1 Legal and Safety Information
- Notice
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
3 Preparation before Use
4 Printing from PC
5 Operation on the Machine
6 Using Various Functions
- Functions Available on the Machine
- Functions
7 Status/Job Cancel
8 Setup and Registration (System Menu)
- System Menu
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
10 Troubleshooting
11 Appendix

KYOCERA TASKalfa 306ci User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for TASKalfa 306ci by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

KYOCERA TASKalfa 2552ci MFP A3 Colour Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 6052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 3252CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 4052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 5052CI MFP LAS COL A3 Manual

KYOCERA TASKalfa 8052ci Manual

KYOCERA TASKALFA 7052CI COLOR LASER MFP Manual

TASKalfa 306ci

PRINT COPY SCAN FAX OPERATION GUIDE

> Preface

Preface

Thank you for purchasing the TASKalfa 306ci.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take

simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before using the machine.

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies.

Please use our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing.

The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.

We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.

A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.

Checking the Equipment's Serial Number

The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.

You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number

before contacting your Service Representative.

Contents

Preface ..................................................................................................................................... i

Contents.................................................................................................................................. ii

Overview ................................................................................................................................. x

Machine Features .................................................................................................................. xi

Color and Image Quality Functions.................................................................................... xv

Basic Color Modes ....................................................................................................... xv

Adjusting Image Quality and Color.............................................................................. xvi

Guides Provided with the Machine................................................................................... xvii

About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ........................................................................... xix

Structure of the guide.................................................................................................. xix

Conventions Used in This Guide.................................................................................. xx

Menu Map............................................................................................................................ xxii

1 Legal and Safety Information ................................................................ 1-1

Notice ................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ............................................................................. 1-2

Environment .............................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................... 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) ............................................................................................... 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ........................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ...................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity ...................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology .............................................................................................. 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ................................... 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ................................................................ 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning .................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................. 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 ............................................................................................................ 1-9

Legal Information .................................................................................................... 1-10

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................. 1-16

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ............................................................................ 1-16

Resource Saving - Paper ........................................................................................ 1-16

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" .................................................... 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ............................................................... 1-17

2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................ 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) .................................................................................... 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ........................................................ 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices .................................................................. 2-6

Connecting Cables ............................................................................................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-8

Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-9

Power On .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Power Off .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................. 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ............................................................................................. 2-10

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ...................................................................... 2-11

Touch Panel ..................................................................................................................... 2-12

Home Screen .......................................................................................................... 2-12

Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 2-16

Functions key .......................................................................................................... 2-17

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set ....................................................................... 2-18

Enter key and Quick No. Search key ...................................................................... 2-19

iii

Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-20

Login/Logout ................................................................................................................... 2-21

Login ....................................................................................................................... 2-21

Logout ..................................................................................................................... 2-22

Default Settings of the Machine ..................................................................................... 2-23

Setting Date and Time ............................................................................................ 2-23

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ................................................................. 2-24

Energy Saver function .................................................................................................... 2-26

Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-26

Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-26

Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-27

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-27

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery) (models except for Europe) ...... 2-27

Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................... 2-28

Installing Software .......................................................................................................... 2-30

Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-30

Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-31

Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-37

Installing Software in Mac Computer ...................................................................... 2-38

Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-40

Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-42

Checking the Counter ..................................................................................................... 2-43

Additional Preparations for the Administrator ............................................................. 2-44

Sending Documents to a PC ................................................................................... 2-44

Strengthening the Security ...................................................................................... 2-44

Command Center RX ...................................................................................................... 2-46

Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-47

Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-48

Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-50

E-mail Settings ........................................................................................................ 2-52

Registering Destinations ......................................................................................... 2-56

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 2-57

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box .......................................................... 2-58

Transferring Data from Our Other Products ................................................................. 2-60

Migrating the Address Book .................................................................................... 2-60

3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1

Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................... 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................. 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ........................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ...................................................................... 3-8

Paper Stopper .................................................................................................................. 3-10

Envelope Stack Guide ..................................................................................................... 3-10

Stack Level Adjuster ....................................................................................................... 3-11

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .............................. 3-12

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-12

Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-13

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-14

Configuring Windows Firewall ................................................................................. 3-18

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ............................................................ 3-22

Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-22

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) .................................... 3-27

4 Printing from PC ..................................................................................... 4-1

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................ 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................. 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 7) ....................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ......................................................................... 4-8

Printing from the Handheld Device ................................................................................. 4-9

Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by Google Cloud Print .................................................................................. 4-9

Printing by Mopria ..................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing Data Saved in the Printer ................................................................................. 4-10

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job ............................... 4-10

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 4-11

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 4-11

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 4-12

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 4-12

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 4-13

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 4-13

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 4-14

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ............................................................ 4-15

Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-15

Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-15

Quick View State ..................................................................................................... 4-15

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-16

Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-16

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-16

Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-17

Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-17

Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-18

5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1

Loading Originals .............................................................................................................. 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ....................................................................... 5-5

Favorites ............................................................................................................................ 5-8

Registering Favorite Using the Wizard Mode ............................................................ 5-9

Registering Favorite Using the Program Mode ....................................................... 5-10

Recalling Favorite using the Wizard Mode .............................................................. 5-11

Recalling Favorite using the Program Mode ........................................................... 5-12

Editing Favorite ....................................................................................................... 5-12

Deleting Favorite ..................................................................................................... 5-12

Application ....................................................................................................................... 5-13

Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 5-13

Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-14

Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-15

Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 5-15

Registering Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-16

Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-16

Editing Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 5-17

Deleting Shortcuts ................................................................................................... 5-17

Copying ............................................................................................................................ 5-18

Basic Operation ....................................................................................................... 5-18

Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-19

Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-19

Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................. 5-20

Sending Document via E-mail ........................................................................................ 5-21

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-21

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-21

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) ............. 5-22

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-22

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer ................................ 5-22

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) ................................... 5-25

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-25

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server ..................................................... 5-25

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ...................................................................................... 5-27

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-27

Scanning Document Using Application ................................................................... 5-27

Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................. 5-28

WSD Scan ........................................................................................................................ 5-29

Installing Driver Software ........................................................................................ 5-29

WSD scan ............................................................................................................... 5-30

Scanning with File Management Utility ......................................................................... 5-31

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-31

Recalling a Favorite Configured in FMU ................................................................. 5-31

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ....................................... 5-32

Send to Me (E-mail) ......................................................................................................... 5-33

Configuring Settings before Sending ...................................................................... 5-33

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged in user .............................. 5-33

Canceling Sending Jobs ................................................................................................. 5-34

Canceling Scanning ................................................................................................ 5-34

Handling Destination ...................................................................................................... 5-35

Specifying Destination ............................................................................................. 5-35

Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-35

Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................. 5-37

Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-38

Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-38

Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-39

Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-39

How to use the FAX Function ........................................................................................ 5-40

Using Document Boxes .................................................................................................. 5-41

What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 5-41

What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 5-41

What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 5-41

Sub Address Box/Polling Box ................................................................................. 5-41

Basic Operation for Document Box ......................................................................... 5-42

Creating a New Custom Box ................................................................................... 5-43

Editing Custom Box ................................................................................................. 5-44

Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 5-45

Storing Documents .................................................................................................. 5-45

Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-46

Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-46

Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-47

Operating using Removable USB Memory ................................................................... 5-48

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory ........................................ 5-48

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-50

Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-51

Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-51

6 Using Various Functions ....................................................................... 6-1

Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................................... 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine ............................................................... 6-2

How to Select Functions ........................................................................................... 6-2

Copy .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Send .......................................................................................................................... 6-4

Custom Box (Printing) ............................................................................................... 6-6

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) .............................................. 6-7

Functions ........................................................................................................................... 6-9

Original Size .............................................................................................................. 6-9

Paper Selection ....................................................................................................... 6-10

Original Orientation ................................................................................................. 6-11

Mixed Size Originals ............................................................................................... 6-12

Collate/Offset .......................................................................................................... 6-12

Staple ...................................................................................................................... 6-13

Paper Output ........................................................................................................... 6-15

Density .................................................................................................................... 6-16

Original Image ......................................................................................................... 6-16

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................... 6-17

Color Selection ........................................................................................................ 6-18

Color Balance .......................................................................................................... 6-19

Hue Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 6-20

Sharpness ............................................................................................................... 6-21

Contrast ................................................................................................................... 6-21

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) .................................. 6-22

Saturation ................................................................................................................ 6-22

Prevent Bleed-through ............................................................................................ 6-23

Zoom ....................................................................................................................... 6-23

Combine .................................................................................................................. 6-25

Duplex ..................................................................................................................... 6-27

Continuous Scan ..................................................................................................... 6-28

Job Finish Notice ..................................................................................................... 6-29

File Name Entry ...................................................................................................... 6-29

Priority Override ...................................................................................................... 6-30

Quiet Mode .............................................................................................................. 6-30

Skip Blank Page ...................................................................................................... 6-30

Duplex (2-sided Original) ........................................................................................ 6-31

Sending Size ........................................................................................................... 6-32

File Format .............................................................................................................. 6-33

File Separation ........................................................................................................ 6-36

Scan Resolution ...................................................................................................... 6-36

E-mail Subject/Body ................................................................................................ 6-36

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................... 6-37

Delete after Print ..................................................................................................... 6-37

Storing Size ............................................................................................................. 6-38

Encrypted PDF Password ....................................................................................... 6-38

JPEG/TIFF Print ...................................................................................................... 6-39

XPS Fit to Page ....................................................................................................... 6-39

7 Status/Job Cancel .................................................................................. 7-1

Checking Job Status ......................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens .................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-7

Checking Job History ....................................................................................................... 7-8

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ......................................................... 7-9

Sending the Log History ............................................................................................ 7-9

Job Operation .................................................................................................................. 7-10

Pause and Resumption of Jobs .............................................................................. 7-10

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-10

Device/Communication ................................................................................................... 7-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ................... 7-12

8 Setup and Registration (System Menu) ............................................... 8-1

System Menu ..................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method ..................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings .............................................................................................. 8-3

vii

Language .................................................................................................................. 8-5

Report ....................................................................................................................... 8-5

User Property ............................................................................................................ 8-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ....................................................................................... 8-8

Common Settings .................................................................................................... 8-10

Home ....................................................................................................................... 8-22

Copy ........................................................................................................................ 8-22

Send ........................................................................................................................ 8-23

Document Box ......................................................................................................... 8-24

FAX ......................................................................................................................... 8-24

Application ............................................................................................................... 8-24

Internet .................................................................................................................... 8-25

Address Book/One Touch ....................................................................................... 8-25

User Login/Job Accounting ..................................................................................... 8-26

Printer ...................................................................................................................... 8-26

System/Network ...................................................................................................... 8-29

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ........................................................................................ 8-40

Adjustment/Maintenance ......................................................................................... 8-42

9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1

Overview of User Login Administration .......................................................................... 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-4

Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-4

Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-5

Changing User Properties ......................................................................................... 9-8

User Login Administration for Printing ..................................................................... 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ............................................................ 9-13

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ................................................................. 9-14

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................... 9-15

Local Authorization .................................................................................................. 9-16

Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. ......................................................................................... 9-20

Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-23

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-25

ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-28

PIN Login Settings .................................................................................................. 9-29

Using User Login Administration .................................................................................. 9-30

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-30

Overview of Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-31

Enabling Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-32

Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-33

Setting an Account .......................................................................................................... 9-34

Adding an Account .................................................................................................. 9-34

Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-35

Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-36

Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-37

Job Accounting for Printing ..................................................................................... 9-38

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-39

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-40

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-41

Configuring Job Accounting .......................................................................................... 9-42

Default Setting ......................................................................................................... 9-42

Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-43

Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-44

Using Job Accounting .................................................................................................... 9-45

Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-45

viii

Unknown ID Job .............................................................................................................. 9-46

10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 10-1

Regular Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning .................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor ........................................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................. 10-3

Replace the toner container .................................................................................... 10-4

Replace the waste toner box ................................................................................... 10-7

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................... 10-10

Replacing Staples ................................................................................................. 10-11

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 10-13

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................. 10-13

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................... 10-13

Printed Image Trouble ........................................................................................... 10-16

Color printing trouble ............................................................................................. 10-19

Responding to Messages ...................................................................................... 10-20

Adjustment/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 10-33

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 10-33

Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................ 10-33

Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 10-38

Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 10-39

Calibration ............................................................................................................. 10-40

Laser Scanner Cleaning ........................................................................................ 10-40

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................... 10-41

Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 10-41

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 and 2 .................................................. 10-43

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) ................................... 10-44

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (2000-sheet x 1) ................................. 10-46

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (500-sheet x 2) ................................... 10-48

Remove any jammed paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ......................................... 10-50

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 10-51

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 ....................................................... 10-54

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (500-sheet x 2) .............................. 10-55

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (2000-sheet x 1) ............................ 10-56

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox ........................................................... 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................. 10-59

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ...................................... 10-60

Clearing a Staple Jam ................................................................................................... 10-62

Clearing a staple jam ............................................................................................ 10-62

11 Appendix ............................................................................................... 11-1

Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................ 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................. 11-6

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 11-8

Entry Screens .......................................................................................................... 11-8

Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 11-10

Paper .............................................................................................................................. 11-11

Basic Paper Specifications .................................................................................... 11-11

Choosing the Appropriate Paper ........................................................................... 11-12

Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 11-15

Specifications ................................................................................................................ 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................. 11-19

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 11-21

Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 11-21

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 11-22

Document Processor ............................................................................................. 11-22

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) ..................................................................................... 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) ............................................................................... 11-23

Paper Feeder (2,000-sheet) .................................................................................. 11-23

Innner Finisher ...................................................................................................... 11-24

Mailbox .................................................................................................................. 11-24

Job separator ........................................................................................................ 11-25

Glossary ......................................................................................................................... 11-26

Index ............................................................................................................................ Index-1

> Overview

Overview

This machine provides standard copy and print functions, and a scanned image can be sent to an E-mail recipient as an

attachment or to a computer on the same network. On products with a FAX function, it is also possible to use the fax

function.

NOTE

• Before using the machine, be sure to read the following:

Legal and Safety Information (page 1-1)

• To prepare the device for use, including setting up cable connections and installing software.

Installing and Setting up the Machine (page 2-1)

• To learn how to load paper, set up shared folders, and add addresses to the address book, refer to the following:

Preparation before Use (page 3-1)

Input Data

Operations from your PC

Document

Box functions

Application

Security

Output Data

Copy functions

Printer functions USB memory

Send functions

Fax functions

Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory

FAX System 11

Operation Guide

This function serves a variety of purposes,

including saving data in the machine and on a USB

memory stick.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-43)

You can expand the machine

functions according to your

needs.

Application

(page 5-13)

You can apply the various machine

security levels to your specific needs.

Frequently-Used Sending

Method (page 5-20)

Command Center RX

You can check the status and change

the settings of the machine from a Web

browser on your computer.

Command Center RX (page 2-46)

Command Center RX User Guide

Strengthen security

(page xii)

Copying (page 5-18)

Printing from PC (page 4-1)

Saving Documents to

USB Memory (Scan to

USB) (page 5-50)

> Machine Features

Machine Features

The machine is equipped with many useful functions.

Using Various Functions (page 6-1)

Here are some examples.

Optimize your office workflow

Access to frequently used functions

with just one touch (Favorites)

You can preset frequently used functions.

Once you register frequently used

settings as favorite, you can call up the

settings easily. Using this favorite brings

the same results even if operated by

another person.

Favorites (page 5-8)

Interrupt other running jobs and

execute your copy job immediately

(Interrupt Copy)

You can interrupt other running jobs and

execute your copy job immediately. When

other users are copying a large number of

sheets, this function allows you to

interrupt those jobs and make your copies

immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the

machine resumes the paused print jobs.

Interrupt Copy (page 5-19)

Scan originals of different sizes at a

time (Mixed Size Originals)

It is useful when preparing conference

materials.

You can set the different sized originals at

one time so you don't need to reset the

originals regardless of size.

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-12)

Optimize your office workflow

Scan a large number of originals in

separate batches and produce as one

job (Continuous Scan)

It is useful when preparing many-page

handouts.

When a large number of originals cannot

be placed in the document processor at

one time, the originals can be scanned in

separate batches and then copied or sent

as one job.

Continuous Scan (page 6-28)

Send one time with multiple sending

options (Multi Sending)

You can send a same document to the

multiple destinations using a different

method.

You can specify multiple destinations of

different send methods such as E-mail,

SMB, and Fax.

You can reduce your workflow by sending

a job at once.

Sending to Different Types of

Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-

32)

Save frequently used documents in

the machine (Custom Box)

You can save the frequently used

document in the machine and print it

when needed.

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-

43)

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

xii

> Machine Features

Save energy and cost

Save energy as needed

(Energy Saver function)

The machine is equipped with Energy

Saver function that automatically

switched into Sleep Mode.

Energy Saver function (page 2-26)

Reduce paper use

(Paper Saving Printing)

You can print originals on both sides of

the paper. You can also print multiple

originals onto one sheet.

Favorites (page 5-8)

Skip blank pages when printing

(Skip Blank Page)

When there are blank pages in a scanned

document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not

blank.

Skip Blank Page (page 6-30)

Create attractive documents Strengthen security

Prevent image bleed-through

(Prevent Bleed-through)

You can prevent image bleed-through

from the reverse side when scanning thin

originals.

Prevent Bleed-through (page 6-23)

Password-protect a PDF file

(PDF Encryption Functions)

Use the PDF format's password security

options to restrict document viewing,

printing and editing.

Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-

38)

Protect data on the SSD

(Encryption / Overwrite)

You can overwrite the unnecessary data

that remains on the SSD automatically.

To prevent an external leakage, the

machine is able to encrypt data before

writing it to the SSD.

Data Security (page 8-39)

Off

xiii

> Machine Features

Strengthen security

Prevent loss of finished documents

(Private Print)

Temporarily saving print jobs in the main

unit document box and outputting them

when in front of the device can prevent

documents from being taken by others.

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

(page 4-10)

(Card Authentication)

You can log in simply by touching an ID

card. You don't need to enter your user

name and password.

Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card

Authentication Kit" (page 11-5)

Strengthen security

(Settings for Administrator)

Various functions are available for

administrators to strengthen security.

Strengthening the Security (page 2-

44)

Use functions more efficiently

Make the machine quiet

(Quiet Mode)

You can make the machine quiet by

reducing its running noise. You can

configure this mode by job.

Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

Expand functions as necessary

(Application)

The functionality of the machine can be

expanded by installing applications.

Applications that help you perform your

daily more efficiently such as a scan

feature and an authentication feature are

available.

Application (page 5-13)

Install the machine without concerning

the network cables (Wireless Network)

If there is a wireless LAN environment, it

is possible to install the unit without

worrying about the network wiring.

Setup (page 8-35)

OK !

xiv

> Machine Features

Use functions more efficiently

Use USB memory

(USB Memory)

It is useful when you need to print

documents outside your office or you

cannot print documents from your PC.

You can print the document from the USB

memory by plugging it directly into the

machine.

Original scanned at the machine can be

saved in the USB memory also.

Printing Documents Stored in

Removable USB Memory (page 5-

48)

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) (page 5-50)

Specify image file format

(File Format)

You can select the various file formats

when sending/storing images.

File Format (page 6-33)

Perform remote operation

(Command Center RX)

You can access to the machine remotely

to print, send or download data.

Administrators can configure the machine

behavior or management settings.

Command Center RX (page 2-46)

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Color and Image Quality Functions

The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.

Basic Color Modes

The basic color modes are as follows.

For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-18)

Color mode Description

Reference image Reference

page

Before After

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a

document being scanned is color or black

& white.

page 6-18

Full Color Scans a document in full color. page 6-18

Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. page 6-18

Black & White Scans a document in black & white. page 6-18

Single Color Prints in any desired color. page 6-18

xvi

> Color and Image Quality Functions

Adjusting Image Quality and Color

To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.

I want to...

Sample image

Function Page

Before After

Adjust the color precisely.

Adjust the density. Density page 6-16

Adjust the color by strengthening

blue or red tones.

Example: Strengthening red

Color Balance page 6-19

Change the image by individually

adjusting each of the six colors:

red, blue, green, cyan, magenta,

and yellow.

Example: Changing red tones

close to yellow to yellow, and

cyan tones close to blue to blue

Hue adjustment page 6-20

Adjust the saturation. Saturation page 6-22

Adjust the image quality precisely

Emphasize or blur the image

outline.

Example: Emphasize the image

outlines

Sharpness page 6-21

Adjust the difference between

dark and light parts of the image.

Contrast page 6-21

Darken or lighten the background

(the area with no texts or images)

of a document.

Example: Lightening the

background

Background Density page 6-22

Prevent bleed-through in 2-sided

originals.

Prevent Bleed-

through

page 6-23

Adjust the scanned image

Decrease the file size and

produce the characters clearly.

File format

[High Comp. PDF]

page 6-33

xvii

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides Provided with the Machine

The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.

The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine

performance.

Printed guides

Start using the

machine quickly

Quick Guide

Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how

to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.

For safe use of the

machine

Safety Guide

Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the

machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

Safety Guide (TASKalfa 306ci)

Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels

and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.

xviii

> Guides Provided with the Machine

Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)

Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.

Version 8.0 or later

Use the machine

thoughtfully

Operation Guide (This Guide)

Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates

default settings and other information.

Use the fax functions FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Explains how to use the fax function.

Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide

Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.

Strengthen security

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite and encrypt

data.

Easily register

machine information

and configure settings

Command Center RX User Guide

Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and

change settings.

Print data from a

computer

Printer Driver User Guide

Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.

Directly print a PDF file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide

Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.

Monitor the machine

and printers on the

network

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net

Viewer.

Scan images and save

with information

File Management Utility User Guide

Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save

scanned documents.

Print without using the

printer driver

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.

Adjust the print or

scan position

Maintenance Menu User Guide

Maintenance Menu provides the explanation on how to configure the print, scan, and other

settings.

xix

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Structure of the guide

The Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter Contents

1Legal and Safety Information Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.

2Installing and Setting up the

Machine

Explains part names, cable connections, installation of the software, login, logout, and

other matters related to administration of the machine.

3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine, such

as how to load paper, and create an address book.

4Printing from PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.

5Operation on the Machine Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals, making

copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.

6Using Various Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.

7Status/Job Cancel Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel jobs

being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner levels, how

to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.

8Setup and Registration (System

Menu)

Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.

9User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login, Job

Accounting)

Explains user login and job accounting.

10 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or other

problem occurs.

11 Appendix Describes convenient options that are available for the machine. Provides information

on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of terms. Explains how to enter

characters, and lists the specifications of the machine.

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions Used in This Guide

Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.

Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.

NOTE

The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do not

appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.

Convention Description

[Bold] Indicates keys and buttons.

"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.

Click to move from the current page to the previously

displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return

to the page from which you jumped to the current page.

Click an item in the Table of

Contents to jump to the

corresponding page.

CAUTION

Indicates that personal injury or

mechanical damage may result

from insufficient attention to or

incorrect compliance with the

related points.

NOTE

Indicates supplemental

explanations and reference

information for operations.

IMPORTANT

Indicates operational requirements

and restrictions to operate the

machine correctly, and avoid

damage to the machine or property.

Refer to

Click the underlined text to jump to

the corresponding page.

xxi

> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)

Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine

In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide

Select the [System Menu] key.



Select [ ].



Select [Common Settings].



Select [Sound].

[System Menu] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]

xxii

> Menu Map

Menu Map

This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.

Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Zoom (page 6-23)

Density (page 6-16)

Duplex (page 6-27)

Combine (page 6-25)

Color Selection (page 6-18)

Functions Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

Collate/Offset (page 6-12)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Original Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-12)

Paper Output (page 6-15)

Staple (page 6-13)

Original Image (page 6-16)

EcoPrint (page 6-17)

Hue Adjustment (page 6-20)

Color Balance (page 6-19)

Sharpness (page 6-21)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 6-23)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-30)

Saturation (page 6-22)

Continuous Scan (page 6-28)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-29)

File Name Entry (page 6-29)

Priority Override (page 6-30)

xxiii

> Menu Map

One Touch Key (page 5-38)

Address Book (page 5-35)

Ext Address Book (Refer to Command Center RX User Guide.)

E-mail (page 5-21)

Folder (page 5-22)(page 5-25)

FAX (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

WSD Scan (page 5-30)

Functions Color Selection (page 6-18)

Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

File Format (page 6-33)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Original Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-12)

Duplex (page 6-31)

Sending Size (page 6-32)

File Separation (page 6-36)

Scan Resolution (page 6-36)

Density (page 6-16)

Original Image (page 6-16)

Sharpness (page 6-21)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 6-23)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-30)

FAX TX Resolution (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Zoom (page 6-23)

Continuous Scan (page 6-28)

File Name Entry (page 6-29)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 6-36)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-29)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 6-37)

FAX Delayed Transmission (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

xxiv

> Menu Map

Functions FAX Direct Transmission (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX Polling RX (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX TX Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Custom Box Menu Print Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Collate/Offset (page 6-12)

Duplex (page 6-27)

Delete after Print (page 6-37)

Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

Functions Priority Override (page 6-30)

File Name Entry (page 6-29)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-29)

EcoPrint (page 6-17)

Job Box Private Print/Stored Job (page 4-11)

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold (page 4-13)

xxv

> Menu Map

Removable Memory Print Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Collate/Offset (page 6-12)

Duplex (page 6-27)

Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

Color Selection (page 6-18)

Functions EcoPrint (page 6-17)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-29)

Priority Override (page 6-30)

Encrypted PDF Password (page 6-38)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 6-39)

XPS Fit to Page (page 6-39)

Menu Store File File Format (page 6-33)

Duplex (page 6-31)

Scan Resolution (page 6-36)

Density (page 6-16)

File Name Entry (page 6-29)

Color Selection (page 6-18)

Functions Quiet Mode (page 6-30)

Original Size (page 6-9)

Original Orientation (page 6-11)

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-12)

Storing Size (page 6-38)

Original Image (page 6-16)

Sharpness (page 6-21)

Contrast (page 6-21)

Background Density Adj. (page 6-22)

Prevent Bleed-through (page 6-23)

Skip Blank Page (page 6-30)

Zoom (page 6-23)

Continuous Scan (page 6-28)

Job Finish Notice (page 6-29)

File Separation (page 6-36)

xxvi

> Menu Map

Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Print Job Status (page 7-8)

Send Job Status (page 7-4)

Store Job Status (page 7-5)

Scheduled Job (page 7-6)

Print Job Log (page 7-8)

Send Job Log (page 7-8)

Store Job Log (page 7-8)

FAX Job Log (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Scanner (page 7-11)

Printer (page 7-11)

FAX (refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Toner Status (page 7-12)

Paper Status (page 7-12)

Removable Memory (page 7-11)

USB Keyboard (page 7-11)

Staple (page 7-12)

Network Connection Status (page 7-11)

Option Network Connection Status (page 7-11)

Wireless Network (page 7-11)

SSD (page 7-11)

xxvii

> Menu Map

Quick Setup Wizard FAX Setup (page 2-28)

Energy Saver Setup (page 2-28)

Network Setup (page 2-28)

Language (page 8-5)

Report Report Print Status Page (page 8-5)

Font List (page 8-5)

Network Status (page 8-5)

Service Status (page 8-6)

Accounting Report (page 8-6)

Sub Address Box List (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX List (Index) (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX List (No.) (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Outgoing FAX Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Incoming FAX Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Optional Network Status (page 8-6)

Admin Report

Settings

Outgoing FAX Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Incoming FAX Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Result Report

Setting

Send Result Report (page 8-6)

RX Result Report (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Job Finish Notice Setting (page 8-6)

Send Log History Sending Log History (page 8-7)

Auto Sending (page 8-7)

Destination (page 8-7)

Job Log Subject (page 8-7)

Personal Information (page 8-7)

Counter Printed Pages (page 2-43)

Scanned Pages (page 2-43)

User Property (page 9-8)

Cassette/MP Tray

Settings

Cassette 1 (page 8-8)

Cassette 2 (page 8-8)

Cassette 3 (page 8-8)

Cassette 4 (page 8-8)

Multi Purpose Tray (page 8-9)

System

xxviii

> Menu Map

Common Settings Default Screen (page 8-10)

Sound Buzzer (page 8-10)

FAX Speaker Volume (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX Monitor Volume (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Original Settings Custom Original Size (page 8-11)

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) (page 8-11)

Default Original Size (Platen) (page 8-12)

Default Original Size (page 8-12)

Paper Settings Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)

Media Type Settings (page 8-15)

Default Paper Source (page 8-14)

Paper Selection (page 8-14)

Media for Auto (Color) (page 8-14)

Media for Auto (B & W) (page 8-14)

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

Function Defaults File Format (page 8-16)

Original Orientation (page 8-16)

Collate/Offset (page 8-16)

File Separation (page 8-16)

Scan Resolution (page 8-16)

Color Selection (Copy) (page 8-16)

Color Select.(Send/Store) (page 8-16)

Original Image (Copy) (page 8-16)

Original Image (Send/Store) (page 8-16)

Background Density Adj. (Copy) (page 8-16)

Background Density Adj. (Send/Store) (page 8-16)

EcoPrint (page 8-16)

Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) (page 8-16)

Prevent Bleed-through (Send/Store) (page 8-16)

Skip Blank Page (Copy) (page 8-16)

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) (page 8-16)

FAX TX Resolution (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Zoom (page 8-17)

xxix

> Menu Map

Common Settings Function Defaults Continuous Scan (Except FAX) (page 8-17)

Continuous Scan (FAX) (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

File Name Entry (page 8-17)

E-mail Subject/Body (page 8-17)

FTP Encrypted TX (page 8-17)

JPEG/TIFF Print (page 8-17)

XPS Fit to Page (page 8-17)

Detail Settings Image Quality (page 8-17)

PDF/A (page 8-17)

High Comp. PDF (page 8-17)

Blank Detection Level (Copy) (page 8-17)

Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) (page 8-17)

Paper Output (page 8-18)

Preset Limit (page 8-18)

Error Handling Duplexing Error (page 8-19)

Finishing Error (page 8-19)

No Staple Error (page 8-19)

Stapling Limit Error (page 8-19)

Paper Mismatch Error (page 8-19)

Inserted Paper Mismatch (page 8-19)

Color Toner Empty Action (page 8-19)

Measurement (page 8-20)

Low Toner Alert Level (page 8-20)

Keyboard Layout (page 8-20)

USB Keyboard Type (page 8-20)

Offset Documents by Job (page 8-20)

Offset One Page Documents (page 8-21)

Format SSD (page 8-21)

Format SD Card (page 8-21)

Display Status/Log (page 8-21)

Function Key Usage (page 8-22)

Home Customize Desktop (page 2-13)

Customize Taskbar (page 2-13)

Wallpaper (page 2-13)

Copy Auto Paper Selection (page 8-22)

Auto % Priority (page 8-22)

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-22)

DP Read Action (page 8-22)

xxx

> Menu Map

Send Dest. Check before Send (page 8-23)

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-23)

Send and Forward (page 8-23)

Color TIFF Compression (page 8-23)

Default Screen (page 8-23)

New Destination Entry (page 8-23)

Recall Destination (page 8-23)

Document Box Custom Box (page 5-43)

Sub Address Box (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Job Box Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-24)

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-24)

Storage Media (page 8-24)

Polling Box (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

FAX (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Application (page 5-13)

Internet Proxy (page 8-25)

Address Book/One

Touch

Address Book (page 3-22)

One Touch Key (page 3-27)

Address Book

Defaults

Sort (page 8-25)

Address Book (page 8-25)

Print List (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

User Login/Job

Accounting

User Login Settings User Login (page 9-3)

Local User List (page 9-5)

ID Card Settings Keyboard Login (page 9-28)

Additional Authentication (page 9-28)

PIN Login(page 9-29)

Simple login

settings

Simple Login (page 9-25)

Simple Login Setup (page 9-25)

Local User Authorization (page 9-16)

User Account

Lockout Settings

Lockout (page 9-4)

Lockout Policy (page 9-4)

Locked out Users List (page 9-4)

Group Authorization

Set.

Group Authorization (page 9-17)

Group List (page 9-18)

Guest Authorization

Set.

Guest Authorization (page 9-20)

Guest Property (page 9-21)

Obtain NW User Property (page 9-23)

xxxi

> Menu Map

User Login/Job

Accounting

Job Accounting

Settings

Job Accounting (page 9-32)

Job Accounting Access (page 9-33)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-44)

Total Job Accounting (page 9-43)

Each Job Accounting (page 9-43)

Accounting List (page 9-34)

Default Setting Apply Limit (page 9-42)

Copy/Printer Count (page 9-42)

Default Counter Limit (page 9-42)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-46)

Printer Emulation (page 8-26)

Color Setting (page 8-26)

EcoPrint (page 8-26)

Override A4/Letter (page 8-26)

Duplex (page 8-26)

Copies (page 8-26)

Orientation (page 8-26)

Wide A4 (page 8-27)

Form Feed TimeOut (page 8-27)

LF Action (page 8-27)

CR Action (page 8-27)

Job Name (page 8-27)

User Name (page 8-27)

MP Tray Priority (page 8-27)

Paper Feed Mode (page 8-27)

Auto cassette Change (page 8-28)

Gloss Mode (page 8-28)

xxxii

> Menu Map

System/Network Network Host Name (page 8-29)

TCP/IP Settings TCP/IP (page 8-29)

IPv4 Settings (page 8-29)

IPv6 Settings (page 8-30)

Bonjour (page 8-30)

Protocol Detail (page 8-31)

WSD Scan (page 8-32)

WSD Print (page 8-32)

Enhanced WSD (page 8-32)

Enhanced WSD (SSL) (page 8-33)

IPSec (page 8-33)

Secure Protocol SSL (page 8-33)

IPP Security (page 8-33)

HTTP Security (page 8-33)

SMTP Security (page 8-33)

POP3 Security (User 1) (page 8-33)

POP3 Security (User 2) (page 8-33)

POP3 Security (User 3) (page 8-33)

LAN Interface (page 8-33)

Ping (page 8-34)

Restart Network (page 8-34)

Proxy (page 8-34)

Optional Network Basic (page 8-35)

Wireless Network Setup (page 8-35)

Basic (page 8-35)

Network Interface (Send) (page 8-36)

Interface Block

Setting

USB Host (page 8-37)

USB Device (page 8-37)

USB Storage (page 8-37)

Optional Interface 1 (page 8-37)

Optional Interface 2 (page 8-37)

xxxiii

> Menu Map

System/Network Security Level (page 8-37)

Restart (page 8-37)

RAM Disk Setting (page 8-38)

Optional Memory (page 8-38)

Data Security (page 8-39)

Optional Function (page 11-6)

Date/Timer/Energy

Saver

Date/Time (page 8-40)

Date Format (page 8-40)

Time Zone (page 8-40)

Auto Panel Reset (page 8-40)

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-40)

Low Power Timer (page 8-40)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-41)

Sleep Level (models except for Europe) (page 8-41)

Sleep Timer (page 8-41)

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

Error Clear Timer (page 8-41)

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-41)

Unusable Time (Refer to FAX System 11 Operation Guide.)

Ping Timeout (page 8-41)

Adjustment/

Maintenance

Quiet Mode Settings Quiet Mode (page 8-42)

Specify for Each Job (page 8-42)

Density Adjustment Copy (page 8-42)

Send/Box (page 8-42)

Contrast Copy (page 8-42)

Send/Box (page 8-42)

Background Density

Adj.

Copy (Auto) (page 8-42)

Send/Box (Auto) (page 8-42)

Auto Color Correction (page 8-42)

Correcting Black Line (page 8-42)

Display Brightness (page 8-42)

Color Registration (page 8-42)

Calibration Cycle (page 8-43)

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 8-43)

Drum Refresh (page 8-43)

Calibration (page 8-43)

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 8-43)

Service Setting (page 8-43)

1-1

1 Legal and Safety

Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on the following topics.

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

Safety Conventions in This Guide ........................................................................................................... 1-2

Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 1-3

Precautions for Use ................................................................................................................................. 1-4

Laser Safety (Europe) .............................................................................................................................. 1-5

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .......................................................................................................... 1-6

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ..................................................................... 1-7

Compliance and Conformity .................................................................................................................... 1-7

Radio Tag Technology ............................................................................................................................. 1-7

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) .................................................................. 1-7

Warranty (the United States and Canada) ............................................................................................... 1-8

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ................................................................................................... 1-9

EN ISO 7779 ............................................................................................................................................ 1-9

EK1-ITB 2000 .......................................................................................................................................... 1-9

Legal Information ................................................................................................................................... 1-10

Energy Saving Control Function ............................................................................................................ 1-16

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .......................................................................................................... 1-16

Resource Saving - Paper ....................................................................................................................... 1-16

Environmental benefits of "Power Management" ................................................................................... 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program .............................................................................................. 1-17

1-2

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Notice

Safety Conventions in This Guide

The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,

other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their

meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient

attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from

insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the related points.

Symbols

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated

inside the symbol.

... [General warning]

... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited

action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Warning of prohibited action]

... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of

the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

... [Alert of required action]

... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are

illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE

An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this

machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

1-3

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Environment

The service environmental conditions are as follows:

Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.

• Avoid locations with vibrations.

• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.

• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the

machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of

copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that

the room be properly ventilated.

Temperature 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)

(But humidity should be 70% or less when temperature is 90.5 °F (32.5 °C).)

Humidity 10 to 80%

(But temperature should be 86 °F (30 °C) or less when humidity is 80%.)

1-4

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Precautions for Use

Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes

and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If

coughing develops, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of

your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.

• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,

contact a physician.

• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.

Other precautions

Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner

container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature

and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose

(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

1-5

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Laser Safety (Europe)

Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is

hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no

radiation can leak from the machine.

This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2007.

Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

These labels are attached to the laser scanner unit inside the machine and are not in a user access area.

Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.

1-6

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam

This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards

established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is

safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and

sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act

A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health

(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without

certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates

compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this

machine, the label is on the right.

3. Optical unit

When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is the label

located on the cover of the optical unit.

4. Maintenance

For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

5. Safety switch

The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

306ci

1-7

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of

Power

Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and

are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs

sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.

Compliance and Conformity

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including

interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all

persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.

1059B-2R6A0881 is the module's certification number.

* The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.

NOTE — Use shielded interface cables.

Radio Tag Technology

In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to

authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

Other precautions

(for users in California, the United States)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1-8

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Warranty (the United States and Canada)

306ci

COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Color Multifunctional Product

(referred to as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP,

against any defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 200,000 copies/prints

from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be

defective within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive

remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish

labor.

This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the

original MFP for a period of one year or 200,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance

Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, the transfer belt, and the fixing unit. Replacement

Maintenance Kits have a 90 day Limited Warranty.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new

KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the

Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is

not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of

the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or

www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to

operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,

(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have

been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA

Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,

which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is

authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF

THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

1-9

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning

It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.

Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do

not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.

• Paper money

• Bank note

• Securities

•Stamp

• Passport

• Certificate

Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

EN ISO 7779

Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder

weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

EK1-ITB 2000

Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um

störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld

platziert werden.

1-10

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Legal Information

Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of KYOCERA Document

Solutions Inc. is prohibited.

Regarding Trade Names

• PRESCRIBE is registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.

• TASKalfa is registered trademarks or trademarks of KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

• Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows 7,

Windows Server 2012, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.

• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.

• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging

Inc.

• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.

• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of

International Typeface Corporation.

• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.

• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.

• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.

• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.

• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered

trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United States, Japan and

other countries.

• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by

Apple Inc.

• Google and Google Cloud Print™ are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.

• Mopria™ is registered trademarks of Mopria™ Alliance.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The

designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

1-11

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

GPL/LGPL

This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)

software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it

under the terms of GPL/LGPL. For further information including availability of the source code, visit

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/gpl/.

OpenSSL License

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.

(http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived

from this software without prior written permission.

For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without

prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software

developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR

SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON

ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Original SSLeay License

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so

as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The

following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the

SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the

package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

1-12

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must

include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,

DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,

WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.

this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Monotype Imaging License Agreement

1Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as

well as the UFST Software.

2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and

versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or

personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of

this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the

fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from

Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights

are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.

3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary

information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access

to and use of the Software and Typefaces.

4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You

agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.

5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License

may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not

remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you

shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as

requested.

6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.

7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with

Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.

Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.

The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular

purpose and merchantability, are excluded.

8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is

repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.

In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential

damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.

9Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.

1-13

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written

consent of Monotype Imaging.

11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data

and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.

Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in

FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).

12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and

conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No

change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.

By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

Knopflerfish License

This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.

http://www.knopflerfish.org

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following

conditions are met:

- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer.

- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following

disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or

promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF

SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR

TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Apache License (Version 2.0)

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are

under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or

indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of

fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source

code, documentation source, and configuration files.

1-14

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including

but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as

indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix

below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the

Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an

original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain

separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or

additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work

by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For

the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the

Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code

control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of

discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise

designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been

received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to

You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,

prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such

Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a

perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent

license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license

applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their

Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was

submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)

alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent

infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date

such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with

or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,

and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of

the Derivative Works; and

(d)If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute

must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices

that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text

file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the

Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices

normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the

License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be

construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license

terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as

a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated

in this License.

1-15

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for

inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any

additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any

separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product

names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and

reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and

each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF

ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible

for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your

exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or

otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,

shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential

damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including

but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other

commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose

to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights

consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on

Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold

each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your

accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets

"[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the

appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of

purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party

archives.

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the

License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS

IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for

the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.

1-16

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Saving Control Function

The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of

time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state

but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of

time.

Low Power Mode

The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 3 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The

amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened.

Low Power Mode (page 2-26)

Sleep

The device automatically enters Sleep when 20 minutes (models for Europe), or 30 minutes (models except for Europe)

have passed since the device was last used. The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated

may be lengthened.

Sleep (page 2-26)

Auto Power Off (models for Europe)

The device automatically turns its power off after the preset time has passed since the device was last used, when the

device is not connected to any computers.

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function

This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single

sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.

Duplex (page 6-27)

Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex

mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that

machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.

Resource Saving - Paper

For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper

certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognised ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or

an equivalent quality standard, be used.

This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to

further saving of forest resources.

* : EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"

Your sales or service representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Environmental benefits of "Power Management"

To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that

automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time.

Although it takes the machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a

significant reduction in energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation

time for energy-saving mode set to the default setting.

1-17

Legal and Safety Information > Notice

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program

We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this

product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

ENERGY STAR® is a voluntary energy efficiency program with the goal of developing and promoting the

use of products with high energy efficiency in order to help prevent global warming. By purchasing

ENERGY STAR® qualified products, customers can help reduce emissions of greenhouse gases during

product use and cut energy-related costs.

2-1

2 Installing and Setting

up the Machine

This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as part names, cable connection, and

software installation.

Part Names (Machine Exterior) ..................... 2-2

Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ................. 2-4

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached) ....................................................... 2-5

Connecting the Machine and Other

Devices ......................................................... 2-6

Connecting Cables ........................................ 2-7

Connecting LAN Cable ....................... 2-7

Connecting USB Cable ....................... 2-8

Connecting the Power Cable .............. 2-8

Power On/Off ................................................ 2-9

Power On ............................................ 2-9

Power Off ............................................ 2-9

Using the Operation Panel .......................... 2-10

Operation Panel Keys ....................... 2-10

Adjusting the Operation

Panel Angle ....................................... 2-11

Touch Panel ................................................ 2-12

Home Screen .................................... 2-12

Display for Device Information .......... 2-16

Functions key .................................... 2-17

Display of Keys That Cannot

Be Set ............................................... 2-18

Enter key and Quick No.

Search key ........................................ 2-19

Help Screen ...................................... 2-20

Logout ............................................... 2-22

Default Settings of the Machine .................. 2-23

Setting Date and Time ...................... 2-23

Network Setup (LAN Cable

Connection) ...................................... 2-24

Energy Saver function ................................. 2-26

Low Power Mode .............................. 2-26

Sleep ................................................. 2-26

Auto Sleep ........................................ 2-27

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ...... 2-27

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and

Quick Recovery) (models except for

Europe) ............................................. 2-27

Quick Setup Wizard .................................... 2-28

Installing Software ....................................... 2-30

Software on DVD (Windows) ............ 2-30

Installing Software in Windows ......... 2-31

Uninstalling the Software .................. 2-37

Installing Software

in Mac Computer .............................. 2-38

Setting TWAIN Driver ........................ 2-40

Setting WIA Driver ............................ 2-42

Checking the Counter ................................. 2-43

Additional Preparations for

the Administrator ......................................... 2-44

Sending Documents to a PC ............. 2-44

Strengthening the Security ................ 2-44

Command Center RX .................................. 2-46

Accessing Command

Center RX ......................................... 2-47

Changing Security Settings .............. 2-48

Changing Device Information ........... 2-50

E-mail Settings .................................. 2-52

Registering Destinations ................... 2-56

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 2-57

Printing a document stored in a Custom

Box .................................................... 2-58

Transferring Data from Our Other

Products ...................................................... 2-60

Migrating the Address Book .............. 2-60

2-2

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

Part Names (Machine Exterior)

1 Document Processor

2 Operation Panel

3 Power Switch

4 Cassette 1

5 Multi Purpose Tray

6 USB Memory Slot

7 Original Eject Table

8 Original Stopper

9 Original Table

10 Original Width Guides

11 Slit Glass

12 Inner Tray

13 Handles

14 Front Cover

15 Platen

16 Original Size Indicator Plates

2-3

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)

17 Paper Width Guide

18 Paper Length Guide

19 Paper Width Adjusting Tab

20 Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray

21 Multi Purpose Tray

22 Paper Width Guide

23 Right Cover 1 Lever

24 Right Cover 1

2-4

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

Part Names (Connectors/Interior)

1 Network Interface Connector

2 USB Interface Connector

3 Option Interface Slot

4 Toner Container (Black)

5 Toner Container (Magenta)

6 Toner Container (Cyan)

7 Toner Container (Yellow)

8 Waste Toner Box

2-5

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)

Part Names (With Optional Equipments

Attached)

1 Tray 1 to 5 (tray 1 is the top tray)

2 Tray A

3 Finisher Tray

4 Job Separator Tray

5 Cassette 3

6 Cassette 4

7 Cassette 2

Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

2-6

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Connecting the Machine and Other Devices

Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.

When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB

When Connecting the Machine to the PC on the Network

Cables that Can Be Used

NOTE

If you are using the machine with the optional wireless interface kit attached, you do not need to connect the LAN

cable. To use a wireless LAN, it is necessary to change the default settings for the machine using the System Menu.

Optional Network (page 8-35)

Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable

Connect a LAN cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,

1000BASE-T)

Connect a USB cable to the

machine.

Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB

compliant, Max. 5.0 m)

USB

MFP FAX

(Option)

Network

Network MFP FAX

(Option)

2-7

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

2Power on the machine and configure the network.

IMPORTANT

If the power is on, turn the power switch off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) (page 2-24)

2-8

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting Cables

Connecting USB Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.

2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

2Power on the machine.

Connecting the Power Cable

1Connect the cable to the machine.

Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power

outlet.

IMPORTANT

If the power is on, turn the power switch off.

Power Off (page 2-9)

IMPORTANT

Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

NOTE

When connecting the power cord to this machine, the touch panel may be displayed

momentarily.

2-9

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off

Power On/Off

Power On

1Turn the power switch on.

Power Off

1Turn the power switch off.

In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time...

IMPORTANT

When turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again

immediately. Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the power switch.

IMPORTANT

When the [Processing] indicator or [Memory] indicator is lit up or blinked, the machine is operating. Turning

off the power switch while the machine is operating may cause it to malfunction.

CAUTION

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the power switch. If the

machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the power plug from the

outlet as a safety precaution.

IMPORTANT

If using the products equipped with the fax function, note that turning the machine off at the power switch

disables fax transmission and reception. Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage

bag to protect it from humidity.

Check that the indicators are off.

2-10

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Using the Operation Panel

Operation Panel Keys

Select the function.

Home Admin

10:10

Lights or blinks when an

error occurs and a job is

stopped.

Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.

Blinks while the machine is accessing the

machine memory, fax memory or USB

memory (general purpose item).

Displays the Home screen. Displays the Status/Job

Cancel screen.

Displays the screen for

sending. You can change it

to display the Address

Book screen.

Displays the Copy screen. Displays the FAX screen.

Touch panel.

Displays buttons for

configuring machine

settings.

Displays the System Menu/

Counter screen.

Authenticates user

switching, and exits the

operation for the current

user (i.e. log out).

Puts the machine into

Sleep Mode. Recovers

from Sleep if in Sleep

Mode.

Numeric keys.

Enter numbers and

symbols.

Clears entered numbers

and characters.

Returns settings to their

default states.

Specifies registered

information such as

address numbers and user

IDs by number.

Cancels or pauses the job

in progress.

Displays the Interrupt Copy

screen.

Finalizes numeric key entry,

and finalizes details during

setting of functions.

Operates linked with the

on-screen [OK].

Starts copying and

scanning operations and

processing for setting

operations.

Lights when there

is paper in the job

separator tray.

2-11

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Using the Operation Panel

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle

The angle of the operation panel can be adjusted.

2-12

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Touch Panel

Home Screen

This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Touching an icon will display the

corresponding screen.

You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)

* The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.

No. Item Description

1Message Displays the message depending on the status.

2Desktop Displays the function icon. Registered function to favorites are also displayed. Icons that are not

displayed on the first page will appear by changing the page.

3Screen-switching keys Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages.

NOTE

You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving the finger sideways (i.e. swiping).

4[Status] Displays the Status screen. If an error occurs, the icon will show "!". Once the error clears, the

display will return to normal.

5[Task Screen] Displays the Task Screen.

6[Logout] Logs out the current user. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.

7Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Selecting "Login User Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.

8Task Screen Displays the task icons.

9[Desktop] Displays the Desktop.

Select the function.

Home Admin

Status

10:10

Desktop

Device

Information Language System

Favorites

Select the function.

Home Admin

10:10

Desktop Task Screen

Select the function.

Home Admin

10:10

122

2-13

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Editing the Home Screen

You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

2Configure the settings.

The available settings are shown below.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Description

Customize Desktop Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1

Select [ ] to display the screen for selecting the function to display. Select

the function to display and [OK].

Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display position of the

selected icon on the Desktop.

To delete an icon from desktop, select the desired one and select [ ].

*1 Displays a maximum of 60 function icons including the installed applications and the functions that

can be used when options are installed.

Customize Task

Screen

Specify the task icons to display on the task screen.*2

*2 4 task icons can be displayed.

Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.

Value: Images 1 to 8

2-14

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Desktop

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Copy*1

*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.

Displays the Copy screen. page 5-18

Send*1 Displays the Send screen. page 5-20

FAX*2

*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

Displays the FAX screen. Refer to FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

Custom Box*3

*3 Displayed when the optional SSD is installed.

Displays the Custom Box screen. page 5-41

Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. page 4-10

Removable Memory*1 Displays the Removable Memory

screen.

page 5-48

Sub Address Box*2 Displays the Sub Address Box screen. Refer to FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

Polling Box*2 Displays the Polling Box screen. Refer to FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

Send to Me (E-mail)*4

*4 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Displays the Send screen. The E-mail

address of the logged-in user is set as

the destination.

page 5-33

Favorites Calls up the registered favorite. The icon

will change according to the function of

the favorite.

page 5-8

Application Name*5

*5 The icon of the application appears.

Displays the selected applications. page 5-13

2-15

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Available Functions to Display on Task Screen

Function Icon Description Reference

page

Device Information Displays the Device Information screen.

Check the system and network

information.

You can also check information on the

options that are used.

page 2-16

Language Displays the Language setting screen in

System Menu.

page 8-5

System Menu Displays the System Menu screen. page 8-3

Favorites Displays the favorite list screen. page 5-8

2-16

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display for Device Information

Shows device information. Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.

1[Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Device Information]

2Check the device information.

Device information

Tab Description

Identification/Network You can check ID information such as the model name, serial

number, host name and location, and the IP address.

FAX*1

*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.

You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax

ID and other fax information.

Software Ver./Capability You can check the software version and performance.

Option You can check information on the options that are used.

2-17

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Functions key

This screen appears when the Functions icon is selected.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Color

Selection

1-sided>>1-sided

A4 100% Normal 0

Full ColorOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Functions

Original Size

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Off

Quiet Mode

Collate

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

1 Display functions.

2Select [Functions] to display other functions.

3 Select [ ] or [ ] to scroll up and down.

2-18

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Display of Keys That Cannot Be Set

Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-

selectable state.

Normal Grayed out

In the following cases, the key is grayed out

and cannot be selected.

• Cannot be used in combination with a

feature that is already selected.

Normal Hidden

Cannot be used because an option is not

installed.

Example: When a SSD is not installed,

[Custom Box] does not appear.

NOTE

If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case, select

the [Reset] key and try again.

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Color

Selection

1-sided>>1-sided

A4 100% Normal 0

Full ColorOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine

1-sided>>1-sided

A4 100% Normal 0

Off

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Color

Selection

Full Color

Select the function.

Home Admin

10:10

Select the function.

Home Admin

10:10

Document Box

Job Box

10:10System Menu/Counter.

< Back

Sub Address Box

Custom Box

Polling Box

1/1

Document Box

Job Box

10:10System Menu/Counter.

< Back

Sub Address Box

Polling Box

1/1

2-19

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Enter key and Quick No. Search key

This section explains how to use the [Enter] key and [Quick No. Search] key on the operation panel.

Using the [Enter] key ( )

The [Enter] key has the same function as the key with the Enter mark (

), such as the [OK  ] key and the [Close  ].

Using the [Quick No. Search] key ( )

The [Quick No. Search] key is used when using the numeric keys to directly enter the number, for example, when

specifying the destination for the transmission using a speed-dial number.

For more information on speed dialing, refer to the following:

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

EcoPrint

Off On

10:10

Cancel OK

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

One Touch Key No. Entry

10:10

(001 - 100)

Cancel OK

2-20

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Touch Panel

Help Screen

If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.

When the [?] (help) is displayed on the touch panel, you can select it to display the Help screen. The Help screen shows

explanations of functions and how to use them.

Example: Checking the paper selection Help screen

1 Display the Paper Selection screen.

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Paper Selection

Auto

10:10

OKCancel

1/2

Plain

A4 Plain

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Select the cassette or multi purpose tray

with the desired paper size.

Auto: Automatically selects the appropriate

paper size.

Cassette 1: Selects the paper in cassette 1.

Cassette 2: Selects the paper in cassette 2.

Cassette 3: Selects the paper in cassette 3.

Cassette 4: Selects the paper in cassette 4.

MP Tray: Selects the paper in the multi purpose tray.

Paper Selection

10:10

1/2

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Select the cassette or multi purpose tray

with the desired paper size.

Auto: Automatically selects the appropriate

paper size.

Cassette 1: Selects the paper in cassette 1.

Cassette 2: Selects the paper in cassette 2.

Cassette 3: Selects the paper in cassette 3.

Cassette 4: Selects the paper in cassette 4.

MP Tray: Selects the paper in the multi purpose tray.

Paper Selection

10:10

1/2

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

1 Help titles

2 Displays information about functions

and machine operation.

3 Closes the Help screen and returns to

the original screen.

4 Scrolls up and down when the help

text cannot be displayed in its entirety

on a single screen.

2-21

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter

your login user name and login password.

Normal login

1Enter the login user name and login password to login.

1If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Keyboard] to enter the login user

name.

2[Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]

2Select [Login].

NOTE

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with administrator

privileges and change your login user name or login password.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method,

authentication destinations are displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be

selected as the authentication destination.

10:10

Keyboard

Enter login user name and password.

2-22

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Login/Logout

Simple Login

If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.

Logout

To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user

name/login password entry screen.

Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:

• When the machine enters the sleep state.

• When the auto panel reset function is activated.

NOTE

If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.

Simple Login Settings (page 9-25)

10:10

Select the user to login.

None

1/3

2-23

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Default Settings of the Machine

Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions

as needed. The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being

installed. Also, configure the following settings if necessary.

Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of

the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

2Configure the settings.

[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]

NOTE

The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.

For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:

Setup and Registration (System Menu) (page 8-1)

NOTE

• To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:

Date/Timer/Energy Saver (page 8-40)

• The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from

the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings

for summer time.

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you

perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on

the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),

Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed

in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

2-24

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),

TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

For other network settings, refer to the following:

TCP/IP Settings

IPv4 setting

Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.

The default settings are "TCP/IP: On, DHCP: On, Auto-IP: On".

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > "Network" > "TCP/IP Setting"

2Configure the settings.

[IPv4 Settings]

Set the following.

When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].

When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].

[IP Address]: Enter the address.

[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).

[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.

When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].

Network (page 8-29)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.

If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and

password, and select [Login].

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting.

In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.

• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to "Off"

• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.

Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-25

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine

Wireless Network Settings

When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed on the machine and the connection settings are configured,

it is possible to print in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment. The following is an introduction to the settings for

connecting using the Quick Setup.

To connect to a wireless access point, Quick Setup has the following four methods. Select a desired method.

Setup (page 8-35)

Available Network

Displays access points to which the machine can connect. Select a desired access point from the list.

Push Button

If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using the push button. This

setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.

PIN Code Method (Device)

Starts connection at both sides using the PIN code which has been generated at the machine. In addition, the same PIN

code should be entered into the access point previously.

PIN Code Method (Terminal)

Starts connection at both sides using the PIN code which has been generated at the access point. In addition, the same

PIN code should be entered into the machine previously.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the

machine OFF and then ON.

Restart Network (page 8-34)

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

2-26

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Energy Saver function

If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to

reduce power consumption. If a further period of time elapses without the machine being used, the machine

automatically enters sleep mode, which minimizes power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode,

the power automatically turns off.

Low Power Mode

If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will

become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode. “Low power.” will be

displayed on the screen.

The default preset time is 3 minute.

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax

data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions.

• Press the touch panel or any key on the operation panel.

• Open the document processor.

• Place originals in the document processor.

The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

Sleep

To enter Sleep, select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save

a maximum amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform the following actions.

• Select the [Energy Saver] key.

The machine will be ready to operate within 17.6 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

Energy Saver indicator

2-27

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.

The default preset time is 20 minutes (models for Europe) or 30 minutes (models except for Europe).

To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-28)

Sleep Rules (models for Europe)

You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot

be recognized.

For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:

Sleep Rules (models for Europe) (page 8-41)

Sleep Level (Energy Saver and Quick Recovery)

(models except for Europe)

For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The

default setting is Energy Saver mode.

Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be

set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized.

To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine

automatically wakes up and starts printing.

For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:

Quick Setup Wizard (page 2-28)

NOTE

If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.

NOTE

If the optional Network Interface Kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.

2-28

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

Quick Setup Wizard

For FAX functions, paper settings, Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured

in a wizard-style screen.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]

FAX Setup*1

*1 FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

Configures basic fax settings.

1. Dialing/RX Mode Dialing Mode*2

Reception Mode

Auto (DRD)*3

*2 Inch version only.

*3 DRD reception mode is available for some countries.

2. Local FAX Info. Local FAX Name

Local FAX Number

Local FAX ID

TTI

3. Sound Speaker Volume

Monitor Volume

Job Finish Buzzer

4. Rings Normal*4

Answering Machine*4

FAX/TEL Switch*4

*4 This setting does not appear in some regions.

5. Output Paper Output*5

*5 Displayed only when the optional Job Separator and mailbox are installed.

6. Redial Retry Times

Energy Saver Setup Configures sleep mode and low power mode.

1. Sleep Mode Sleep Timer

Sleep Level (models except for Europe)

2. Low Power Mode Low Power Timer

Network Setup Configures network settings.

1. Network Obtain IP Address

IP Address*6

Subnet Mask*6

Default Gateway*6

*6 Not displayed when "Obtain IP Address" is set to [Auto (DHCP)].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For this,

you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set as

shown below.

2-29

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard

2Select a function.

3Configure the settings.

Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:

Help Screen (page 2-20)

Control Description

End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.

Previous Returns to the previous item.

Skip Advances to the next item without setting the current item.

Next Advances to the next screen.

Back Returns to the previous screen.

Complete Register the settings and exit the wizard.

2-30

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software

Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of

this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.

Software on DVD (Windows)

You can use either [

Express Install

] or [

Custom Install

] can be selected for the installation method. [

Express Install

] is

the standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [

Express Install

], use [

Custom Install

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-34)

Software Description Express

Install

KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.

Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by

a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the

features of the machine.

Use this driver to create PDF files.

KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format

developed by Microsoft Corporation.

KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-

driver

This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some

restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used

with this driver.

FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software

application as a fax via the machine.

Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant

software application.

Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables

reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner

and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired

using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a

TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.

KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network. -

Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing

reporting function.

File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a specified

network folder.

KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/

Reader.

FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in

a software application.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

• WIA Driver and KX XPS DRIVER cannot be installed on Windows XP.

2-31

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Windows

Express Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Express Install].

For details on Custom Installation, refer to the following:

Custom Install (page 2-34)

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2Click [Accept].

2-32

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Install using [Express Install].

You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host name of the

standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)

NOTE

• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the

machine, verify that it is connected to the computer via a network or USB cable and that it

is turned on and click (Refresh).

• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].

• To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0

beforehand.

2-33

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

NOTE

When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting

will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the

machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.

Printer Driver User Guide

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

2-34

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Custom Install

The following procedure is an example for installing the software in Windows 7 using [Custom Install].

1Insert the DVD.

2Display the screen.

3Install using [Custom Install].

1Select the device to be installed.

NOTE

• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select

[Cancel].

• If the autorun screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].

• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes] ([Allow]).

1 Click [View License Agreement]

and read the License Agreement.

2 Click [Accept].

2-35

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

2Select the driver to be installed.

3Select the utility to be installed.

4Click [Install].

NOTE

• To install Status Monitor, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET Framework 4.0

beforehand.

2-36

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Finish the installation.

When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test

page, click the "Print a test page" checkbox and select the machine.

Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the printer driver installation procedure.

If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:

NOTE

When you have selected [Device settings] in Windows XP, the dialog box for device setting

will appear after [Finish] is clicked. Configure the settings for options installed on the

machine. Device settings can be configured after the installation is completed.

Printer Driver User Guide

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

2-37

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Uninstalling the Software

Perform the following procedure to delete the Software from your computer.

1Display the screen.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs], [Kyocera], and

[Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.

2Uninstall the software.

Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.

3Finish uninstalling.

If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts.

This completes the software uninstallation procedure.

NOTE

Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the

search box. Select [Uninstall Kyocera Product Library] in the search list.

NOTE

• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.

• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to

uninstall the software.

2-38

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Installing Software in Mac Computer

The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.

1Insert the DVD.

Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.

2Display the screen.

Double-click [Kyocera OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.

3Install the Printer Driver.

Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.

This completes the printer driver installation.

If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected.

If an IP connection is used, the settings below are required.

NOTE

• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

• When printing from a Macintosh computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].

Printer (page 8-26)

• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.

Bonjour (page 8-30)

• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.

2-39

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

4Configure the printer.

1Open System Preferences and add the printer.

Select [

Default

] and click the item that appears in "Name".

3Select the options available for the machine.

4The selected machine is added.

NOTE

When using

an IP

connection,

click the IP icon for an IP connection and then enter the

host name or IP address.

The number entered in "Address" will automatically appear in

"Name". Change if needed.

3 Select the driver in "Use".

2-40

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting TWAIN Driver

1Display the screen.

1Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver

Setting]. TWAIN Driver screen appears.

2Click [Add].

2Configure TWAIN Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search

box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in the search list.

(Network)

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Enter the machine's IP address or host name.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.

(USB)

1 Enter the machine name.

2 Select this machine from the list.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Set the Compression Level.

2-41

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

3Finish registering.

NOTE

When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.

NOTE

Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.

2-42

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software

Setting WIA Driver

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search].

Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the

search box. Select [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

(Network)

(USB)

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.

3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside

SSL.

4 Set units of measurement.

5 Click [OK].

1 Click the [Settings] tab.

2 Set the Compression Level.

3 Set units of measurement.

4 Click [OK].

2-43

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Checking the Counter

Checking the Counter

Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Counter]

2Check the counter.

2-44

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

Additional Preparations for the Administrator

In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and

configure the settings as needed.

Sending Documents to a PC

To Send to a Shared Folder (Send to Folder (SMB))

To send a document that has been loaded, you need to create a shared folder to receive the document on your computer.

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-12)

To E-mail Scanned Images (Send as E-mail)

You can send a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

E-mail Settings (page 2-52)

Strengthening the Security

This machine is shipped with two default users registered one with Machine Administrator rights, and another with

Administrator rights.Logging in as this user will allow you to configure all settings; therefore, please change the login

user name and password.

In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this

machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (page 9-1)

I want to... Function Reference page

Restrict the users of the machine. User Login page 9-2

Auto Panel Reset page 8-40

ID Card Settings*1

*1 The optional Card Authentication Kit is required.

page 9-28

Restrict the basic functions that can be used. Local Authorization page 9-16

Group Authorization Set. page 9-17

Prevent another user from handling the

documents stored in the machine.

Custom Box*2

*2 The optional SSD is required.

page 5-43

Prevent the data stored in the machine from

being leaked.

Data Overwrite*3

*3 The optional Data Security Kit is required.

Refer to the Data

Security Kit (E)

Operation Guide.

Encryption*3

PDF Encryption Functions page 6-34

Completely delete the data on the machine

before disposing of the machine.

Data Sanitization page 8-39

2-45

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Additional Preparations for the Administrator

I want to... Function Reference page

Protect the transmission from interception and

wiretapping.

IPP over SSL page 8-31

HTTPS page 8-31

LDAP Security Refer to the

Command Center

RX User Guide.

SMTP Security page 8-33

POP3 Security page 8-33

FTP Encrypted TX page 6-37

Enhanced WSD (SSL) page 8-33

IPSec page 8-33

SNMPv3 page 8-31

2-46

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Command Center RX

If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.

This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.

Command Center RX User Guide

Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password and click [Login].

Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,

Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator

privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

Setting Description Administ-

rator

General

User

Device

Information

The machine's structure can be checked.

Job Status Displays all device information, including print and scan jobs, storing jobs,

scheduled jobs, and job log history.

Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a document box. *1

*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the permissions of the user.

Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. *1

Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. -

Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. -

Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. -

Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. -

Management

Settings

Configure the advanced management settings. -

NOTE

Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

2-47

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Accessing Command Center RX

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)

https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")

The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well

as their current status.

2Configure the function.

Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.

NOTE

If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed,

configure the certificate.

Command Center RX User Guide

You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.

NOTE

To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and

Password and click [Login]. Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user

to access all pages, including Document Box, Address Book, and Settings on the navigation

menu. The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown

below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-48

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Security Settings

This section explains how to change the security settings.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4Click [Security Settings].

2-49

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Configure the Security Settings.

From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.

NOTE

For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

2-50

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Changing Device Information

Change the device information of the machine.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].

2-51

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Specify the host name.

Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

To restart the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings]

menu, and then click [Restart Network] in "Restart".

2-52

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

E-mail Settings

By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and

to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.

In addition, configure the following.

•SMTP settings

Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"

• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails

Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"

• The setting to limit the size of E-mails

Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1Display the screen.

Display the SMTP Protocol screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

2-53

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].

2Configure the settings.

Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".

2-54

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

3Display the screen.

Display the E-mail Settings screen.

From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].

2-55

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

4Configure the settings.

Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.

5Click [Submit].

Setting Description

SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.

SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol"

is set to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP

protocol to [On].

SMTP Server Name*1

*1 Be sure to enter the items.

Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.

SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port

number is 25.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication Protocol To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for

authentication.

SMTP Security Set SMTP security.

Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the

[Protocol Settings] page.

Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct.

Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the

domain names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction

can also be specified by e-mail address.

POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the

function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following

items if you want to enable the function of receiving e-mail on the

machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Check Interval

Run once now

Domain Restriction

POP3 User Settings

E-mail

Send

Settings

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes.

When E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message

appears and E-mail sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you

have set E-mail Size Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of

0 (zero) to enable E-mail sending regardless of the size limit.

Sender Address*1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails,

such as the machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery

report will go to a person rather than to the machine. The sender

address must be entered correctly for SMTP authentication. The

maximum length of the sender address is 128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear

at the end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further

identification of the machine. The maximum length of the

signature is 512 characters.

Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default

Settings] page.

2-56

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Registering Destinations

You can register destinations to the machine's Address Book, from Command Center RX.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3Log in with administrator privileges.

The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper

case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)

4From the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].

5Click [Add].

2Populate the fields.

1Enter the destination information.

Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as

when registering via operation panel.

2Click [Submit].

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-22)

2-57

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Creating a New Custom Box

You can register a custom box from Command Center RX.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click [Add].

2Configure the Custom Box.

1Enter the box details.

Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to populate,

refer to the following:

2Click [Submit].

NOTE

To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

2-58

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

Printing a document stored in a Custom Box

A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Command Center RX.

1Display the screen.

1Launch your Web browser.

2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.

Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.

[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Network]

3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].

4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.

2-59

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX

2Print the document.

1Select the document you wish to print.

Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.

2Click [Print].

3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].

2-60

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

Transferring Data from Our Other Products

By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.

This section explains how to transfer data between our products.

Migrating the Address Book

The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using the KYOCERA Net Viewer on the

included DVD.

For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

Backing Up Address Book Data to PC

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Create a backup.

1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and

select [Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Click [Next].

3Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

2-61

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

4Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from

[Overwrite settings on target device], and then click [Next].

5Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].

6Click on [Save to file].

7Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].

For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".

NOTE

If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and

then click [OK]. The default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters

are distinguished (case sensitive)).

2-62

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

8After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.

Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.

Writing Address Book Data to the Machine

1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.

2Load the Address Book data.

1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select

[Advanced] - [Set multiple devices].

2Click [Next].

3Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].

2-63

Installing and Setting up the Machine > Transferring Data from Our Other Products

4Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target

device], and then click [Next].

Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's Address

Book from entry No.1.

5Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].

6Click [Finish].

The write process of the Address Book data starts.

7Once the write process is complete, click [Close].

3-1

Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the following operations.

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Precaution for Loading Paper .................................................................................................................. 3-2

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units ............................................................................................................ 3-3

Loading in the Cassettes ......................................................................................................................... 3-4

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder ..................................................................................................... 3-8

Paper Stopper .................................................................................................................................................. 3-10

Envelope Stack Guide ...................................................................................................................................... 3-10

Stack Level Adjuster ......................................................................................................................................... 3-11

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-12

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-12

Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-13

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-14

Configuring Windows Firewall ............................................................................................................... 3-18

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................................. 3-22

Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-22

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) ................................................................... 3-27

3-2

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading Paper

Load paper in the cassettes.

Precaution for Loading Paper

When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following steps.

Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.

In addition, note the following points.

• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded

may cause a jam.

• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems.

Seal any remaining paper after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the

paper storage bag.

• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat

from the cassette heater.

• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by

removing it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.

IMPORTANT

If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is

stapled or clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image

quality.

NOTE

If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like

logo or company name, refer to the following:

Paper (page 11-11)

3-3

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Selecting the Paper Feeder Units

Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.

No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page

1Cassette 1 A4, B5, A5, A6, B6,

Legal, Oficio II,

Letter, Executive,

Statement, Folio,

16K,

216mm×340mm,

Envelope Monarch,

Envelope #10,

Envelope DL,

Envelope C5,

Envelope #9,

Envelope #6-3/4,

B5(ISO), YOUKEI2,

YOUKEI4, Custom

Plain, Preprinted,

Bond, Recycled,

Vellum, Rough,

Letterhead, Color,

Prepunched, Thick,

High Quality,

Envelope*1,

Custom 1 to 8

*1 Cannot be used for the optional Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet).

500 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-4

2Cassette 2

3Cassette 3

4Cassette 4

5Cassette 3 A4, Letter 2,000 sheets

(80 g/m2)

page 3-8

NOTE

• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.

• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause paper

jams or other faults.)

• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.

3-4

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Cassettes

Load paper in the cassettes. The procedures here represent the cassette 1.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.

Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left

and right sides of the cassette.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

3-5

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

4Load paper.

5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely

against the paper. If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit

the paper.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

3-6

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

6Gently push the cassette back in.

7Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]

8Configure the function.

Select the paper size and paper type

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-8)

NOTE

• If the size label is required, please contact your dealer or our sales and service

representative.

• Paper size can be automatically detected and selected, refer to the following:

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-8)

3-7

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

When you load envelopes in the Cassettes

Load envelope in the cassettes. Here, we'll explain the procedures for cassette 1, as an example.

1Load the envelope with the print side facing up.

Example: When printing the address.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]>”Cassette 1”[Next]

3Configure the function.

Select the paper size and type of envelope.

4Set by using the printer driver on the PC.

Select the paper size and type of envelope using the printer driver on the PC.

IMPORTANT

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of

envelope. Be sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the

wrong direction or on the wrong face.

• Ensure that the loaded envelopes do not exceed the level indicator.

NOTE

Approximately 50 envelopes can be loaded.

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-8)

Printing on Standard Sized Paper (page 4-4)

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

3-8

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder

Load paper in the large capacity feeder.

1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.

2Load paper.

NOTE

Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

3-9

Preparation before Use > Loading Paper

3Gently push the cassette back in.

4Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]

5Select a function.

Select [Cassette 3].

6Configure the function.

Select the paper type

Cassette 1 (to 4) (page 8-8)

3-10

Preparation before Use > Paper Stopper

Paper Stopper

When using paper large than A4/Letter, open the paper stopper shown in the figure.

Envelope Stack Guide

To use an envelope, open the Envelope Stack Guide as shown below.

3-11

Preparation before Use > Stack Level Adjuster

Stack Level Adjuster

If output paper curls noticeably, extend the Stack Level Adjuster as shown.

Extending the Stack Level Adjuster

Restoring the Stack Level Adjuster

NOTE

When using the Job Separator for output, you can if needed extend the Stack Level Adjuster on the Job Separator.

3-12

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Preparation for Sending a Document to a

Shared Folder in a PC

Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your

computer. Screens of Windows 7 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other

versions of Windows.

Making a note of the computer name and full

computer name

Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.

1Display the screen.

From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Computer] and then [System Properties].

2Check the computer name.

Check the computer name and full computer name.

Screen example:

Computer name: PC001

Full computer name: PC001.abcdnet.com

Windows XP:

If the full computer name does not have a dot (.), the full computer name and the computer

name are the same.

If the full computer name has a dot (.), the text string in front of the dot (.) in the full computer

name is the computer name.

Example: PC001.abcdnet.com

PC001 is the computer name

PC001.abcdnet.com is the full computer name

After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

In Windows XP, after checking the computer name, click the [Cancel] button to close the

"System Properties" screen.

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

In Windows XP, right-click [My Computer] and select [Properties]. The [System

Properties] dialog box appears. Click the [Computer Name] tab in the window that

appears.

In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from

[Libraries], and then select [Properties].

In Windows 8.1, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [PC] from the desktop

[Explorer] and select [Properties]. Or, right-click the Window icon and select [System].

3-13

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Making a note of the user name and domain name

Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.

1Display the screen.

From [Start] button on the Windows, select [All Programs] (or [Programs]), [Accessories]

and then [Command Prompt].

In Windows 8, display [Apps] on [Search] in charms on the Start screen, and select

[Command Prompt].

The Command Prompt window appears.

2Check the domain name and user name.

At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].

Check the user name and domain name.

Screen example:

User Name: james.smith

Domain Name: ABCDNET

3-14

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder

Create a shared folder to receive the document in the destination computer.

1Create a folder.

1Create a folder on your computer.

For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.

NOTE

If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or group.

1From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Appearance and

Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

In Windows XP, click [My Computer] and select [Folder Options] in [Tools].

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], [Appearance

and Personalization], and then [Folder Options].

Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".

In Windows XP, click the [View] tab and remove the checkmark from

[Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".

Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.

3-15

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Right-click the "scannerdata" folder and click [Share] and [Advanced sharing]. Click

the [Advanced Sharing] button.

In Windows XP, right-click the "scannerdata" folder and select [Sharing and Security] (or [Sharing]).

2Configure permission settings.

1Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.

In Windows XP, select [Share this folder] and click the [Permissions] button.

2Make a note of the [Share name].

3Click the [Add] button.

3-16

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

4Specify the location.

5Set the access permission for the user selected.

In Windows XP, go to step 6.

6Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.

NOTE

"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen

security, it is recommended that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow]

checkmark.

1 If the computer name that you made a note

of on page is the same as the domain name:

If the computer name is not shown in "From

this location", click the [Locations] button,

select the computer name, and click the [OK]

button.

Example: PC001

If the computer name that you made a note of

on page is not the same as the domain name:

If the text after the first dot (.) in the full

computer name that you made a note of

does not appear in "From this location", click

the [Locations] button, select the text after

the dot (.), and click the [OK] button.

Example: abcdnet.com

2 Enter the user name that you made a note of

on page in the text box, and click the [OK]

button.

Also the user name can be made by clicking

the [Advanced] button and selecting a user.

1 Select the user you entered.

2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the "Change"

and "Read" permissions

3Press [OK].

3-17

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

7Check the details set in the [Security] tab.

In Windows XP, make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox for the "Modify" and

"Read & execute" permissions, and click the [OK] button.

1 Select the [Security] tab.

2 Select the user you entered.

If the user does not appear on "Group or user

names", click [Edit] button to add user in a similar

way of "configuration of permission settings".

3 Make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow]

checkbox for the "Modify" and "Read & execute"

permissions.

4 Click the [Close] button.

3-18

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

Configuring Windows Firewall

Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.

1Check file and printer sharing.

1From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security], and

[Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.

2Add a port.

1From [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [System and Security],

and [Check firewall status].

NOTE

Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.

NOTE

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

3-19

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

2Select [Advanced settings].

3Select [Inbound Rules].

4Select [New Rules].

5Select [Port].

3-20

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

6Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter

"445" then click [Next].

7Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.

8Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.

3-21

Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC

9Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].

In Windows XP or Windows Vista

1In Windows XP, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], and then

[Windows Firewall].

In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security],

and then [Turn Windows Firewall on or off].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Click the [Exceptions] tab and then the [Add port...] button.

3Specify Add a Port settings.

Enter any name in "Name" (example: Scan to SMB). This will be the name of the new port.

Enter "445" in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol".

4Click [OK] button.

In Windows 8

1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then

[Windows Firewall].

If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.

2Configure the settings

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-18)

3-22

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be changed.

The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

Adding a Destination (Address Book)

Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When adding a

group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

Registering a contact address

A maximum of 200 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as destination

name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (Only on products with the fax

function installed).

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [] >

[Contact]

2Add the name.

Enter the destination name to be displayed on the Address Book > [Next]

3Add the address.

E-mail Address

[E-mail Address] > Enter the E-mail address > [OK]

NOTE

Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-56)

NOTE

If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in with

administrator privileges.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

3-23

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (SMB) Address

[SMB] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] and [Login Password] > [OK]

The table below explains the items to be entered.

To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select in the following order.

[Menu] > [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]

If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a

destination.

If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup

Name", and "Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. The login user name and login password entry screen

appears.

Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen that appears > [Next].

NOTE

For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information

that you noted when you created the shared folder. For details on creating shared folders,

refer to the following:

Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (page 3-12)

Item Description Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name Computer name Up to

64 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

Port Port number

(Normally 445.)

1 - 65535

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

•Select [Menu] > [Connection Test] to check the connection to the server you chose. If the

connection fails, check the entries you made.

3-24

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

The Folder (FTP) Address

[FTP] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] and [Login Password] > [OK]

The table below explains the items to be entered.

1To specify the Address Number, select [Address Number].

2Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (001 to 250).

To have the number assigned automatically, enter "000".

3Select [OK].

4Check if the destination entry is correct > [Save]

The destination is added to the Address Book.

Item Descriptions Max. No. of

Characters

Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*1

*1 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path for the file to be stored

For example: User\ScanData

If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

Port Port number

(Normally 21.)

1 - 65535

64 characters

NOTE

• Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

•Select [Menu] > [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose.

If the connection fails, check the entries you made.

NOTE

• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears.

3-25

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Registering a Group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When adding a

group, a maximum of 50 groups can be added in the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [] >

[Group]

2Add the name.

Enter the

group

name to be displayed on the Address Book > [Next]

3 Select the members (destinations).

1Select [Member].

2Select [].

3Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. The selected destinations are indicated

by a checkmark in the check box.

4Select [OK].

If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 2 to 4.

5Select [End].

6To specify the Address Number, select [Address Number].

7Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (001 to 250).

To have the number assigned automatically, enter "000".

8Select [OK].

9Check if the selected destination was added to the group > [Save]

The group is added to the Address Book.

NOTE

To add a group, you need individually added destinations. Register one or more individual destinations as needed

before proceeding. Up to 100 individually registered destinations and a combined total of up to 5 SMB and FTP

destination folders can be registered in a single group.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

NOTE

• Address Number is an ID for a destination. A free number can be selected.

• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears.

3-26

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing and Deleting Address Book Entries

Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]

2Edit or delete the destination.

Editing a Contact

1Select [ ] for the destination (contacts) to edit.

2Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.

3After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

Editing a Group

1Select [ ] for the group to edit.

2Change "Name" and "Address Number".

3Select [Member].

4To delete any destination from the group, select the destination > [] > [Yes]

To add the destination, select [ ].

5After you have completed the changes, [Save] > [Yes]

Deleting a Contact or Group

Select a destination or group to delete > [] > [Yes]

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

Registering a contact address (page 3-22)

Registering a Group (page 3-25)

3-27

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch

Key)

Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key. A maximum of 100 destinations can be registered.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]

2Add One Touch Keys.

1Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) for the destination > []

Selecting the [Quick No. Search] key enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.

Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number > [

]

Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

3Enter the One Touch Key name displayed in the send base screen > [Next]

4Select [Save].

The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

NOTE

• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.

Registering Destinations (page 2-56)

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

NOTE

Up to 24 characters can be entered.

Refer to the following for details on entering characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

None

AAA

None

BBB

None

CCC

1/9

End

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

3-28

Preparation before Use > Registering Destinations in the Address Book

Editing and Deleting One Touch Key

Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]

2Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) to edit. Selecting the [Quick No. Search] key

enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

2Edit and delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

Changing the Registered Information

1[Menu] > [Edit] > [Destination]

2Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information

of the selected destination.

3[OK] > [Save] > [Yes]

Add the destination to the One Touch Key.

Deleting the Registered Information

1Select [].

Select [

Yes

Deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.

NOTE

Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

ABCD

OKCancelMenu

123456

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

1/2

003

004

001

efg@efg.com

12345.com

11111.com

Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key

10:10System Menu/Counter.

None

AAA

None

BBB

None

CCC

1/9

End

001

004

007

010 011

008

005

002

012

009

006

003

4-1

4 Printing from PC

This chapter explains the following topics:

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................................................... 4-2

Displaying the Printer Driver Help ............................................................................................................ 4-3

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 7) ...................................................................... 4-3

Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-4

Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-4

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-6

Canceling Printing from a Computer ........................................................................................................ 4-8

Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................................................ 4-9

Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................... 4-9

Printing Data Saved in the Printer .................................................................................................................... 4-10

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing the Job .............................................................. 4-10

Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................. 4-11

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................................................... 4-11

Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 4-12

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 4-12

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 4-13

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 4-13

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 4-14

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 4-14

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-15

Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-15

Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-15

Quick View State .................................................................................................................................... 4-15

Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-16

Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-16

Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-16

Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-17

Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-17

Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-18

4-2

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.

Printer Driver User Guide

No. Description

1 [Quick Print] tab

Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it

changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.

[Basic] tab

This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,

destination, and duplex printing.

[Layout] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,

poster printing, and scaling.

[Imaging] tab

This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.

[Publishing] tab

This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.

[Job] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used

documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can

be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that

you don't want others to see.

[Advanced] tab

This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.

2 [Profiles]

Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a

convenient practice to save frequently used settings.

3[Reset]

Click to revert settings to their initial values.

4-3

Printing from PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen

Displaying the Printer Driver Help

The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display

Help as explained below.

Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings (Windows 7)

The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when

printing. For the settings, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices

and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the

[Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.

NOTE

You can also display the printer driver help when you click the desired item and press the [F1] key on your keyboard.

1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the

screen.

2 Click the item you want to know about.

4-4

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing from PC

Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.

This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.

Printing on Standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size in the [Basic] tab of the

print settings screen of the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

2Configure the settings.

1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.

NOTE

• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD

(Product Library).

• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.

• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multi purpose tray before

performing the following procedure.

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-5)

4-5

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

2Select the [Basic] tab.

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.

To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or

envelopes, the paper size needs to be registered.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

3Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (page 4-6)

4-6

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper

If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab

of the print settings screen of the printer driver.

The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu.

1Display the print settings screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.

2Register the paper size.

1Click the [Basic] tab.

2Click the [Page Size...] button.

3Click the [New] button.

4Enter the paper size.

5Enter the name of the paper.

6Click the [Save] button.

7Click the [OK] button.

NOTE

To execute printing at the machine, set the paper size and type in the following:

Paper Settings (page 8-13)

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

4-7

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

8Click the [OK] button.

3Display the screen.

Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.

4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.

1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.

2Select the [Basic] tab.

4-8

Printing from PC > Printing from PC

3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media type" menu and select

the media type.

4Select the paper source in the "Source" menu.

5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.

5Start printing.

Click the [OK] button.

Canceling Printing from a Computer

To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:

1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at

the bottom right of the Windows desktop to display a dialog

box for the printer.

2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select

[Cancel] from the "Document" menu.

NOTE

If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media

type" menu.

NOTE

When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:

Canceling Jobs (page 5-19)

4-9

Printing from PC > Printing from the Handheld Device

Printing from the Handheld Device

This machine supports the AirPrint, Google Cloud Print and Mopria. According to the supported OS and application, you

can print the job from any handheld device or computer without installing a printer driver.

Printing by AirPrint

AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later

products.

To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Google Cloud Print

Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print

from a machine connected to the Internet.

The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Printing by Mopria

Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be

installed and enabled in advance. For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.

NOTE

A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.

It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can be

registered from a PC connected to the same network.

4-10

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Data Saved in the Printer

You can save the print job into the Job Box of this device and print it as necessary. To use the Job Box, an optional SSD

or SD/SDHC memory card must be installed in the device. The RAM disk may also be used as the Job Box.

If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box

(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.

Follow the work flow below when using Job Box.

Specifying the Job Box from a computer and sending the print job. (page 4-10)

Using the operation panel to specify a file within a Box and printing it.

You can print the documents from the following boxes.

Printing Documents from Private Print Box (page 4-11)

Printing Document from Stored Job Box (page 4-12)

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box (page 4-13)

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box (page 4-14)

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job

Use the procedure below to store data in a Job Box.

1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application. The Print

dialog box displays.

2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.

3Click the [Properties] button. The Properties dialog box

displays.

4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check

box to set the function.

NOTE

• To use Stored Job Box and Quick Copy Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the

machine.

• For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

4-11

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Documents from Private Print Box

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job

from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by

entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon

completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.

Print the documents stored in a Private Print box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Enter the access code.

3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

4Select [OK].

Printing starts.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print

Box

You can delete the documents stored in the Private Print Box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

Select the document to delete > [ ] > Enter the access code

The document is deleted.

Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job

10:10Document Box.

doc0100908134821

doc4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

2014/10/10 11:11

2014/10/10 10:10

4-12

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Stored Job Box

In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as

necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job

Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

Print the documents stored in a Stored Job box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [OK].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box

You can delete the documents stored in the Stored Job Box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > []

2Select [Yes].

The document is deleted.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

NOTE

If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be

displayed. Enter the password using the numeric keys.

Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job

10:10Document Box.

doc0100908134821

doc4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

2014/10/10 11:11

2014/10/10 10:10

4-13

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Quick Copy Box

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a

document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies

are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. By default, up to 32 documents can be

stored. When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

You can print the documents stored in the Quick Copy box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [OK].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box

You can delete the documents stored in the Quick Copy Box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > []

2Select [Yes].

The document is deleted.

NOTE

• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.

• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Quick Copy Job Retention (page 8-24)

Job Box - Quick Copy/Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

doc0100908134821

doc4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

2014/10/10 10:10

2014/10/10 11:11

4-14

Printing from PC > Printing Data Saved in the Printer

Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining

copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while

maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can

change the number of copies to print.

You can print the documents stored in the Proof and Hold box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Print the document.

1Select the document to print > [Print]

2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

3Select [OK].

Printing starts.

Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold

Box

You can delete the documents stored in the Proof and Hold Box. The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Job Box]

2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].

3Select the creator of the document.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document to delete > [ ]

2Select [Yes].

The document is deleted.

Job Box - Quick Copy/Proof and Hold

10:10Document Box.

doc0100908134821

doc4100908135138

< Back PrintMenu

1/1

Cancel

2014/10/10 10:10

2014/10/10 11:11

4-15

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Monitoring the Printer Status (Status

Monitor)

The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.

Accessing the Status Monitor

The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.

Exiting the Status Monitor

Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit manually:

Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.

• Exit automatically:

The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.

Quick View State

The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.

Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.

NOTE

When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.

• KX DRIVER is installed.

•Either [Enhanced WSD] or [EnhancedWSD(SSL)] is enabled.

Network (page 8-29)

Expand button

Alert Tab

Toner Status Tab

Paper Tray Status Tab

Printing Progress Tab

Settings icon

4-16

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Printing Progress Tab

The status of the print jobs is displayed.

Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.

Paper Tray Status Tab

Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.

Toner Status Tab

The amount of toner remaining is displayed.

Status icon

Job list

4-17

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Alert Tab

If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.

Status Monitor Context Menu

The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.

•Command Center RX

If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the

Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings.This menu is not displayed when using USB

connection.

Command Center RX User Guide

•Notification…

This sets the display of the Status Monitor.

Status Monitor Notification Settings (page 4-18)

•www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Open our website.

•Exit

Exits the Status Monitor.

4-18

Printing from PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)

Status Monitor Notification Settings

The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.

Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.

1Select Enable event notification.

If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is

executed.

2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in

Available events.

3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.

Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.

When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text

box.

NOTE

The available file format is WAV.

5-1

Operation on the Machine

This chapter explains the following topics:

Loading Originals .......................................... 5-2

Placing Originals on the Platen ........... 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document

Processor ............................................ 5-3

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ...... 5-5

Favorites ....................................................... 5-8

Registering Favorite Using the Wizard

Mode ................................................... 5-9

Registering Favorite Using the Program

Mode ................................................. 5-10

Recalling Favorite using the Wizard

Mode .................................................. 5-11

Recalling Favorite using the Program

Mode ................................................. 5-12

Editing Favorite ................................. 5-12

Deleting Favorite ............................... 5-12

Application .................................................. 5-13

Installing Applications ....................... 5-13

Activating Applications ...................... 5-14

Deactivating Applications .................. 5-15

Uninstalling Applications ................... 5-15

Registering Shortcuts .................................. 5-16

Adding Shortcuts ............................... 5-16

Editing Shortcuts ............................... 5-17

Deleting Shortcuts ............................. 5-17

Copying ....................................................... 5-18

Basic Operation ................................ 5-18

Interrupt Copy ................................... 5-19

Canceling Jobs ................................. 5-19

Frequently-Used Sending Method .............. 5-20

Sending Document via E-mail ..................... 5-21

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-21

Sending Scanned Document via

E-mail ................................................ 5-21

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder

on a Computer (Scan to PC) ....................... 5-22

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-22

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer ....................... 5-22

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

(Scan to FTP) .............................................. 5-25

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-25

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server ............................................... 5-25

Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-41

WSD Scan .................................................. 5-29

Installing Driver Software .................. 5-29

WSD scan ......................................... 5-30

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA ................... 5-27

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-27

Scanning Document Using

Application ........................................ 5-27

Scanning with File Management Utility ....... 5-31

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-31

Recalling a Favorite Configured

in FMU .............................................. 5-31

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending) ............................................ 5-32

Send to Me (E-mail) .................................... 5-33

Configuring Settings before Sending .... 5-33

Sending a document to the mail address

of the logged in user ......................... 5-33

Canceling Sending Jobs ............................. 5-34

Canceling Scanning .......................... 5-34

Handling Destination ................................... 5-35

Specifying Destination ...................... 5-35

Choosing from the Address Book ..... 5-35

Choosing from the One Touch Key ... 5-38

Checking and Editing Destinations ... 5-38

Confirmation Screen of Destinations .... 5-39

Recall ................................................ 5-39

How to use the FAX Function ..................... 5-40

Using Document Boxes .............................. 5-41

What is Custom Box? ....................... 5-41

What is Job Box? .............................. 5-41

What is Removable Memory Box? .... 5-41

Sub Address Box/Polling Box ........... 5-41

Basic Operation for Document Box .. 5-42

Creating a New Custom Box ............ 5-43

Editing Custom Box .......................... 5-44

Deleting Custom Box ........................ 5-45

Storing Documents ............................ 5-45

Printing Documents in Custom Box .. 5-46

Moving Documents in Custom Box ... 5-46

Deleting Documents in Custom Box . 5-47

Operating using Removable USB Memory ...... 5-48

Printing Documents Stored

in Removable USB Memory ............. 5-48

Saving Documents to USB Memory

(Scan to USB) ................................... 5-50

Check the USB Memory Information .... 5-51

Removing USB Memory ................... 5-51

5-2

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals

Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.

• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.

• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.

Placing Originals on the Platen

You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-11)

NOTE

For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:

Multi Purpose Tray (page 8-9)

CAUTION

Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

1 Put the scanning side facedown.

2 Align it flush against the original

size indicator plates with the back

left corner as the reference point.

5-3

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

Loading Originals in the Document Processor

The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are

scanned.

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the

document processor may become dirty.

• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before

loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Originals with adhesive tape or glue

• Originals with cut-out sections

• Curled original

• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)

• Carbon paper

• Crumpled paper

1Adjust the original width guides.

IMPORTANT

• Do not push the document processor forcefully when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the platen

glass.

• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open

position.

Weight 50 to 120 g/m2

(duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)

Sizes Maximum Folio (Legal) to Minimum A6 (Statement)

No. of sheets 75 sheets or less (50 to 80 g/m2)

IMPORTANT

• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals left on

the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.

• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the top

cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.

5-4

Operation on the Machine > Loading Originals

2Place the originals.

1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the

leading edge into the document processor as far as it will go.

2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: B5, A4, Letter, or

Legal).

NOTE

For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:

Original Orientation (page 6-11)

IMPORTANT

Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap,

readjust the original width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the

maximum level may cause the originals to jam.

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way

that the holes or perforations will be scanned last (not first).

5-5

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 100 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).

For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:

Choosing the Appropriate Paper (page 11-12)

For the paper type setting, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• Plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets

• Thick paper (209 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 10 sheets

• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 25 sheets

• Hagaki (Cardstock): 20 sheets

• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2:

5 sheets

• OHP film: 1 sheet

• Coated: 30 sheets

1Open the multi purpose tray.

IMPORTANT

• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick and set the weight of the

paper you are using.

• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner tray may

cause a paper jam.

NOTE

• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:

Paper Settings (page 8-13)

• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the

following:

Multi Purpose Tray (page 8-9)

5-6

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

2Adjust the multi purpose tray size.

Paper sizes are marked on the multi purpose tray.

3Load paper.

Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.

After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi

purpose tray.

4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multi purpose tray using

the operation panel.

Precaution for Loading Paper (page 3-2)

IMPORTANT

• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.

• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.

• When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check that there is no paper left

over in the tray from a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small

amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and you want to add more, first

remove the left-over paper from the tray and include it with the new paper before

loading the paper back into the tray.

• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides

to fit the paper in order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the load limits.

Multi Purpose Tray (page 8-9)

5-7

Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray

Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

Example: When printing the address.

IMPORTANT

• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).

• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be sure to

load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE

• When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-8)

• Lift up the stopper when you load cardstock in the multi purpose tray.

Close the flap.

Open the flap

Portrait form

envelopes

Landscape form

envelopes

Hagaki

(Cardstocks)

Oufuku hagaki

(Return postcard)

5-8

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

Favorites

Frequently used functions can be registered as favorites so that they can be called up easily.

The following functions are pre-registered on this machine. You can delete these functions as well as register new

functions.

Favorites Name Description Default Registration

ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license

or an insurance card.

When you scan the front and back of the card,

both sides will be combined and copied onto a

single sheet.

• Copying Functions

• Program mode

• Combine: [2 in 1]

Color Selection: [Black & White]

Continuous Scan: [On]

Original Size: [A5/Statement]

Paper Selection: Cassette 1

Zoom: [Auto Zoom]

Paper Saving Copy Use this when you want to reduce paper use.

Page combining and two-sided copying can be

set by following the screen.

• Copying Functions

• Wizard mode

• Combine: [2 in 1]

2-sided/Original: [1-sided]

Duplex: [1-sided>>2-sided]

Paper Selection: Cassette 1

Copies: 1

Scan to PC (Address

Entry)

Use this when you want to send the image to

either a shared folder on a PC or an FTP server

folder. The settings such as the destination and

color selection can be set by following the screen.

• Sending Functions

• Wizard mode

• Destination: New PC Folder

Color Selection: [Full Color]

File Name Entry: Default

File Format: [PDF]

Continuous Scan: [Off]

Scan Resolution: [300×300 dpi]

Scan to PC (Address

Book)

Use this when you want to send the image to

either a shared folder on a PC registered in the

Address Book or to an FTP server folder. The

settings such as the destination and color

selection can be set by following the screen.

• Sending Functions

• Wizard mode

• Destination: Address Book

Color Selection: [Full Color]

File Name Entry: Default

File Format: [PDF]

Continuous Scan: [Off]

Scan Resolution: [300×300 dpi]

Scan to E-mail (Address

Entry)

Use this when you want to send the image to an

E-mail address. The settings such as the

destination and color selection can be set by

following the screen.

• Sending Functions

• Wizard mode

• Destination: New E-mail Address

Color Selection: [Full Color]

File Name Entry: Default

File Format: [PDF]

Continuous Scan: [Off]

Scan Resolution: [300×300 dpi]

E-mail subject: Default

E-mail body: Default

5-9

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up:

• Wizard mode: Registered settings are called up in order and configured as you check or change each one.

• Program mode: Settings are called up immediately when you select the key to which they are registered.

Registering Favorite Using the Wizard Mode

Sending is explained as an example below.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Favorites]

1[Menu] > [Add]

2Select the job type.

3Select [Wizard].

4Select the recall function > [Next]

5Enter the new favorite name > [Next]

Scan to E-mail (Address

Book)

Use this when you want to send the image to an

E-mail address registered in the Address Book.

The settings such as the destination and color

selection can be set by following the screen.

• Sending Functions

• Wizard mode

• Destination: Address Book

Color Selection: [Full Color]

File Name Entry: Default

File Format: [PDF]

Continuous Scan: [Off]

Scan Resolution: [300×300 dpi]

E-mail subject: Default

E-mail body: Default

NOTE

Up to 20 settings can be registered as favorites.

NOTE

When the job type is "Copy", the Destination Recall Method screen will not be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Favorites Name Description Default Registration

5-10

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

6Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

7Select [Save].

The favorite is registered.

8"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears.To display a

registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you

want to display the icon of registered favorite, and select [Save].

Registering Favorite Using the Program Mode

When registering favorites in program mode, configure the copy function, send function, fax function (Only on products

with the fax function installed.), destination, or other setting to register.

1Display the screen.

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Select the sending functions and destinations that you want to register in the program.

3Select [Favorites].

1[Menu] > [Add]

2Select the job type.

3Select [Program].

4Enter the new favorite name > [Next]

Item Description

Name Enter the name displayed on the favorite screen (up to 32 characters).

Job Type The type of the selected job is displayed.

Number*1

*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges.

Enter the favorite number.

If you enter 00, the smallest number available will be automatically

assigned.

Owner*2

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Displays the owner of the favorite.

Permission*2 Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they

are shared with other users.

Destination*3

*3 Displayed when the job type is [Send] or [FAX].

Selects the Destination Recall Method.

Functions Selects the functions to be displayed in the wizard.

Function Type Selects the method for recalling favorites.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

5-11

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

5Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

6Select [Save].

The favorite is registered.

7"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears. To display a

registered favorite on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you

want to display the icon of registered favorite, and select [Save].

Recalling Favorite using the Wizard Mode

Use the procedure below to recall a registered favorite using the Wizard Mode.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Favorites] on the Home screen, or the key of the registered favorite.

Selecting the key of the registered favorite will recall the favorite. If you selected [Favorites], proceed

to the next step.

2Select the key for the favorite you want to recall.

2Execute the favorite.

1The registered screens are displayed in order. Make the desired settings and select [Next].

When all the settings are complete, the confirmation screen is displayed.

2Place the originals > [Start] key

Item Description

Name Enter the name displayed on the favorite screen (up to 32 characters).

Job Type The type of the selected job is displayed.

Number*1

*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with

administrator privileges.

Enter the favorite number.

If you enter 00, the smallest number available will be automatically

assigned.

Owner*2

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Displays the owner of the favorite.

Permission*2 Configures permission settings for favorites to determine how they

are shared with other users.

Function Type Selects the method for recalling favorites.

NOTE

To edit the settings, select [<Back] and make changes as desired.

5-12

Operation on the Machine > Favorites

Recalling Favorite using the Program Mode

Use the procedure below to recall a registered favorite using the Program Mode.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Favorites] on the Home screen, or the key of the registered favorite.

Selecting the key of the registered favorite will recall the favorite. If you selected [Favorites], proceed

to the next step.

2Select the key for the favorite you want to recall.

2Execute the favorite.

Place the originals > [Start] key

Editing Favorite

You can change favorite number and favorite name.

Use the procedure below to edit a favorite.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Favorites]

2Edit the favorite.

1[Menu] > [Edit]

2Select the favorite you wish to edit.

3 Change the favorite number, favorite name, permission.

4[Save] > [Yes]

Deleting Favorite

You can also delete a favorite.

Use the procedure below to delete a favorite.

1Display the screen.

[Home] key > [Favorites]

2Delete the favorite.

To delete

1[Menu] > [Delete]

2Select the favorite you wish to delete.

3Select [Yes].

When registering a favorite, you can choose from two methods for calling it up: (page

5-9)

5-13

Operation on the Machine > Application

Application

The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.

Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are

available.

For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.

Installing Applications

To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.

The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]

2Install the application.

1Select [ ].

2Insert the removable memory containing the application to be installed into the USB

Memory Slot.

3Select the application to be installed > [Install]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].

NOTE

A maximum of 16 applications and 5 licenses can be installed on the machine. To add different applications, uninstall

an application that has been installed.

Uninstalling Applications (page 5-15)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

When the message "Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. Are you

sure?" is displayed, select [No].

5-14

Operation on the Machine > Application

4Select [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation

may take some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

Activating Applications

The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]

2Activate the application.

1Select the desired application > [Menu] > [Activate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].

2[Official] > Enter the license key > [OK]

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not

appear, go to step 2-3. To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

3Select [Yes].

3Select the application icon in the Home screen.

Select the application icon.

The application will start up.

NOTE

• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.

• To remove the removable memory, select [Remove Memory] and wait until the

message "Removable Memory can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the

removable memory.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

IMPORTANT

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will

no longer be able to use the application.

5-15

Operation on the Machine > Application

Deactivating Applications

The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]

2Deactivate the application.

1Select the application you want to deactivate > [Menu] > [Deactivate]

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].

2Select [Yes].

Uninstalling Applications

The procedure is as follows.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]

2Uninstall the application.

1Select the application you want to uninstall > []

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].

2Select [Yes].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

5-16

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts

Registering Shortcuts

You can register shortcuts for easy access to the frequently used functions. The settings for the selected function can

also be registered. A function name linked to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to

2 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, fax functions, and functions set for document box.

Adding Shortcuts

Shortcut registration is performed in the "Functions" screen of each function. Use the procedure below to register a

shortcut.

1Display the screen.

In the Copy, Send, Document Box, or FAX screen, select as follows.

[Functions] > [Add/Edit Shortcut]

2Register the shortcuts.

1Select [Add].

2Select the key to which you wish to register the shortcut.

The following types of shortcuts are available:

3Select the function screen to display with the shortcut.

4Enter the shortcut name > [Next]

Up to 24 characters can be entered.

5Select [Save].

The shortcut is registered.

Private Shortcut 1, 2 Private shortcuts are only available for use by the logged in user.

They can only be set while using user login administration.

Shared Shortcut 1, 2 Shared shortcuts can be used by all machine users. When using user

have logged in as administrators.

NOTE

If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can

be replaced with a new one.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

5-17

Operation on the Machine > Registering Shortcuts

Editing Shortcuts

Follow the steps shown below to change a shortcut number/name.

1In the "Functions" screen of each function, select [Add/Edit

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.

2Edit the shortcut.

1Select [Edit].

2Select the shortcut type and number you wish to edit.

3Select [Number] or [Name].

4Change the settings > [OK]

5[Save] > [Yes]

Deleting Shortcuts

Follow the steps shown below to delete a shortcut.

1In the "Functions" screen of each function, select [Add/Edit

Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.

2Delete the shortcut.

1Select [Delete].

2Select the shortcut you wish to delete.

3Select [Yes].

5-18

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Copying

The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.

Basic Operation

Follow the steps as below for basic copying.

1[Home] key > [Copy]

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3Select the functions.

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other

selectable functions will be shown as a list.

4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.

Specify the desired number up to 999.

5Press the [Start] key.

Copying begins.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

How to Select Functions (page 6-2)

NOTE

This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the

original will be scanned while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the

reserved copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will

appear. Select [Reserve Next] and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-22)

Job No.:0005

10:10Copying...

Scanned Pages

Cancel

Job Name:doc00000320101010101010

Reserve

Copies

5-19

Operation on the Machine > Copying

Interrupt Copy

This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.

When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

1Configure the settings.

1Select the [Interrupt] key.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.

2Press the [Start] key.

Interrupt copying begins.

3When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.

The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

Canceling Jobs

You can also cancel jobs by selecting the [Stop] key.

1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

The copy job is canceled.

When there is a job printing or on standby

Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Delete] > [Yes]

NOTE

• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically cancelled and

printing resumes.

You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change the delay as required.

Interrupt Clear Timer (page 8-41)

• The interrupt copy function may be unavailable depending on the status of document finisher usage. In this case, try

the priority override.

Priority Override (page 6-30)

NOTE

Reserve Next Priority

is set to [

Off

], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting the [

Stop

]

key or [

Cancel

] will cancel the printing job in progress.

Reserve Next Priority (page 8-22)

5-20

Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method

Frequently-Used Sending Method

This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In

order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is

recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

Sending Document via E-mail (page 5-21)

• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC) (page 5-22)

• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP) (page 5-25)

• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA (page 5-27)

NOTE

• Different sending options can be specified in combination.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-32)

• The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

5-21

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document via E-mail

Sending Document via E-mail

Follow the steps as below for sending a document via e-mail.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an E-mail, configure the SMTP and E-mail settings using the Command Center RX.

E-mail Settings (page 2-52)

Sending Scanned Document via E-mail

Follow the steps as below for sending a document via e-mail.

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [E-mail].

4Enter destination E-mail address > [OK]

Up to 128 characters can be entered.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination. Up to

100 E-mail addresses can be specified.

You can register the entered E-mail address in the Address Book by selecting [

] > [

Add to

Address Book

]. You can also replace the information for a previously registered destination.

Destinations can be changed later.

5Select the functions.

Select [Functions] to display other functions.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

Send (page 6-4)

5-22

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

Sending Document to Desired Shared

Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, configure the following settings.

• Make a note of the computer name and full computer name

• Make a note of the user name and domain name

• Create a shared folder and make a note of a shared folder

• Configure the Windows firewall

Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a

Computer

Follow the steps as below for sending a document to the desired shared folder on a computer.

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].

4Select [SMB] from the folder type.

Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (page 3-12)

Making a note of the user name and domain name (page 3-13)

Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (page 3-14)

Configuring Windows Firewall (page 3-18)

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-23

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

5Select the folder specification method.

To search for a folder on a PC on the network, select [Search Folder from Network] or

[Search Folder by Host Name].

If you selected [Search Folder from Network], you can search all PCs on the network for a

destination.

If you selected [Search Folder by Host Name], you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and

"Host Name" to search PCs on the network for the destination.

Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to

specify in the screen that appears, and select [Next]. The login user name and login password

entry screen appears.

After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the

shared folders appear. Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next]. The

address of the selected shared folder is set.

Select the folder from the Search Results list.

6Enter the destination information.

Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, select [Next] to advance to the

next item.

The table below lists the items to be set.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Detail Max.

characters

Host Name Computer name Up to

64 characters

Path Share name

For example:

scannerdata

If saving in a folder in the shared folder:

share name\folder name in shared folder

Up to

128 characters

Port Port number

(Normally 445.)

1 - 65535

User Name

For example: james.smith

If the computer name and domain name are different:

Domain name\User name

For example: abcdnet\james.smith

Up to

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

5-24

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Desired Shared Folder on a Computer (Scan to PC)

7Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

2Check the connection.

[Menu] > [Connection Test]

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].

8Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

9Select the functions.

Select [Functions] to display other functions.

10 Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

Send (page 6-4)

5-25

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP

Server (Scan to FTP)

You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).

Protocol Detail (page 8-31)

Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server

Follow the steps as below for sending a document to the folder on an FTP server.

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

Place the originals.

3In the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].

4Select [FTP] from the folder type.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-26

Operation on the Machine > Sending Document to Folder on an FTP Server (Scan to FTP)

5Enter the destination information.

Enter the next information. Once you have entered one item, select [Next] to advance to the

next item.

The table below lists the items to be set.

6Check the status.

1Check the information.

Change the delay as required.

2Check the connection.

[Menu] > [Connection Test]

"Connected." appears when connection to the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot

connect." appears, review the entry.

To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.

You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add to Address Book].

7Select [OK].

Destinations can be changed later.

8Select the functions.

Select [Functions] to display other functions.

9Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Data to be entered Max.

characters

Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to

64 characters

Path*1

*1 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the

slash "/" not using the back-slash.

Path to the receiving folder

For example: User\ScanData

Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.

Up to

128 characters

Port Port number

(Normally 21.)

1 - 65535

64 characters

(Case sensitive.)

Up to

64 characters

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

Send (page 6-4)

5-27

Operation on the Machine > Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

Scanning using TWAIN or WIA

This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN or WIA.

Configuring Settings before Sending

Before sending an document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are configured.

Setting TWAIN Driver (page 2-40)

Setting WIA Driver (page 2-42)

Scanning Document Using Application

This subsection explains how to scan an original using TWAIN. The WIA driver is used in the same way.

1Display the screen.

1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.

2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.

2Configure the scan settings.

Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.

3Place the originals.

4Scan the originals.

Click the [Scan] button. The document data is scanned.

NOTE

For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application

software.

NOTE

For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-28

Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method

Useful Sending Method

You can specify the follwing useful scanning (sending) methods.

WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

WSD Scan (page 5-29)

Scanning with File Management Utility:Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it to a

specified network folder or PC.

Scanning with File Management Utility (page 5-31)

Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,

folders, etc.) in a single operation.

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (page 5-32)

Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.

Send to Me (E-mail) (page 5-33)

5-29

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

WSD Scan

WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

Installing Driver Software

For Windows 7

1Display [Network] in the Start menu.

Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].

2Install the driver.

Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].

During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver

Software Installation" screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the

[Driver Software Installation] screen, the installation is completed.

For Windows 8 and Microsoft Windows Server 2012

1Click [Search] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [View

devices and printers].

2Install the driver.

Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].

When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the

installation is completed.

NOTE

• To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected, and

"WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.

WSD Scan (page 8-32)

• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your software.

NOTE

When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.

1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.

2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and

click [Customize].

3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box

and click [OK].

NOTE

If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].

If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].

5-30

Operation on the Machine > WSD Scan

WSD scan

1[Home] key > [Send]

2Place the originals.

3Display the screen.

Select [WSD Scan].

4Scan the originals.

Procedure using this machine

1Select [From Operation Panel].

2Select the destination computer > [OK]

Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.

You can view information on the selected computer by selecting [ ].

3Press the [Start] key.

Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure from Your Computer

1[From Computer] > [OK]

2Use the software installed on the computer to send the images.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

5-31

Operation on the Machine > Scanning with File Management Utility

Scanning with File Management Utility

File Management Utility is an application that sends a scanned document to a specified network folder or PC. You can

create a work flow with FMU for processing of the scanned document, and register the workflow in the machine as a

favorite.

Configuring Settings before Sending

To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the

multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. To install File Management Utility, refer

to the following.

Installing Software (page 2-30)

Recalling a Favorite Configured in FMU

1Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the

computer (or server) on which File Management Utility is

installed.

2Place the original.

3Recall a favorite.

1Select [Favorites] on the Home screen, or the key of the registered favorite.

If you selected the key of the favorite registered with FMU, the favorite is activated. If you selected

[Favorites], proceed to the next step.

2Select the key of the favorite you want to use.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary

information and press [Next].

5When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and

configure the necessary settings.

The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.

6Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:

File Management Utility User Guide

5-32

Operation on the Machine > Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)

Sending to Different Types of Destinations

(Multi Sending)

You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Fax functionality

can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for

sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items

E-mail: Up to 100

Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP

FAX: Up to 100

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or

folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one

time.

NOTE

If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.

5-33

Operation on the Machine > Send to Me (E-mail)

Send to Me (E-mail)

When user login is enabled, the document is sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.

Configuring Settings before Sending

To use this function, configure the followings.

To use this function, the function icon must be displayed in the home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)

An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)

Sending a document to the mail address of the logged

in user

The sending procedure using [E-mail] is as follows.

1Select [Home] key.

2Select [Send to Me (E-mail)] .

5-34

Operation on the Machine > Canceling Sending Jobs

Canceling Sending Jobs

You can also cancel jobs by selecting the [Stop] key.

Canceling Scanning

The procedure to cancel the scanned document is as follows.

1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.

2Cancel a job.

When there is a job is being scanned

Job Cancel appears.

When there is a job sending or on standby

Canceling job screen appears.

Select the job you wish to cancel > [Delete] > [Yes]

NOTE

Selecting the [

Stop

] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.

5-35

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Handling Destination

This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.

Specifying Destination

Select the destination using either of the following methods except entering address directly:

• Choosing from the Address Book

• Choosing from the External Address Book

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

• Choosing from One Touch key.

• Choosing from the FAX

Choosing from the Address Book

Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:

Registering Destinations in the Address Book (page 3-22)

1In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book].

2Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations

are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.

You can also select [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.

Choosing from the Address Book (page 5-35)

Command Center RX User Guide

Choosing from the One Touch Key (page 5-38)

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

NOTE

• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.

Default Screen (page 8-23)

• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the other

party number using the numeric keypad.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-36

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Destination Search

Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.

3Accept the destination > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

Keys used Search type Subjects searched

1Advanced search by

destination

Advanced search by type of registered

destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or

Group).

2Narrow Down Advanced search by

destination

Advanced search by type of registered

destination (Email, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX or

Group).

Search (Name) Search by name Search by registered name.

Search (No.) Search by number Search by registered address number.

Sort (Name) Change of display

order

Sorts the list by destination name.

Sort (No.) Sorts the list by destination address number.

3Search by name Search by registered name.

NOTE

You can specify a destination by address number by selecting the [Quick No. Search] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

NOTE

You can set the default "Sort" settings.

Sort (page 8-25)

Address Book (All)

10:10

002

ABCD

< Back OKCancelMenu

123456

EFGH

IJKL

MNOP

1/2

003

004

001

efg@efg.com

12345.com

11111.com

5-37

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Choosing from the External Address Book

Select a destination registered in the external address book.

1In the basic screen for sending, select [External Address

Book].

2Select the destinations.

Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. The selected destinations

are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.

You can also select [Menu] to perform a more detailed search.

3Accept the destination > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

NOTE

For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

NOTE

You can set the default "Sort" settings.

Sort (page 8-25)

5-38

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Choosing from the One Touch Key

Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.

1In the basic screen for sending, select [One Touch Key].

2Select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.

If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination is hidden on the touch panel, select [ ] or

[ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch Keys.

3Accept the destination > [OK]

Destinations can be changed later.

Checking and Editing Destinations

Check and edit a selected destination.

1Display the screen.

1Specify the destination.

2Select [Check].

2Check and edit the destination.

To add a new destination, select [].

To display details for the destinations, select [ ]. New E-mail addresses and PC folders can

be edited if they have been specified.

To delete the selected destination, select [].

NOTE

This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already been registered.

For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-27)

NOTE

You can specify a One Touch Key by one touch number by selecting the [Quick No.

Search] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

NOTE

• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen

appears. Enter the same host name and path again, and select [OK].

Entry Check for New Dest. (page 8-23)

• When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen appears

after pressing the [Start] key.

Dest. Check before Send (page 8-23)

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

5-39

Operation on the Machine > Handling Destination

Confirmation Screen of Destinations

When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing

the [Start] key.

Dest. Check before Send (page 8-23)

Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.

1Select [ ] or [ ] to confirm all destination.

Selecting [ ] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

To delete the destination, select the destination you want to delete > [ ] > [Yes]

To add the destination, select [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.

2Select [Check].

Recall

Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. When you want to send the image to

the same destination, select [Recall], and you can call the destination you sent on the destination list.

1Select [Recall].

The destination you sent is displayed on the destination list.

2Press the [Start] key.

Sending starts.

NOTE

Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot

select [Check] unless you have confirmed all destination.

NOTE

When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also

displayed. If necessary, add or delete the destination.

NOTE

• When [On] is selected in "Dest. Check before Send", a destination confirmation screen is

displayed when you press the [Start] key.

Confirmation Screen of Destinations (page 5-39)

• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.

- When you turn the power off

- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)

- When you log out

Destinations Check

10:10Check the destinations and press [Check].

1/2

1234567890

2345678901

3456789012

4567890123

A OFFICE

B OFFICE

C OFFICE

D OFFICE

Cancel Check

5-40

Operation on the Machine > How to use the FAX Function

How to use the FAX Function

On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

5-41

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Using Document Boxes

Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.

The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, removal USB memory, Subaddress Box, and

Polling Box.

What is Custom Box?

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You

can create or delete a Custom Box.

The following operations are possible:

• Creating a new Custom Box

• Printing Document in a Custom Box

•Storing Documents to a Custom Box

• Editing Documents in a Custom Box

• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box

What is Job Box?

Job Box is a generic name for the "Private Print/Stored Job Box", and "Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box". These Job

Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

What is Removable Memory Box?

A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data

directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory

in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).

Sub Address Box/Polling Box

Sub Address Box/Polling Box store the fax data.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

NOTE

• To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

• The operation on Custom Box you perform from operation panel can also be made using Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

NOTE

• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.

Deletion of Job Retention (page 8-24)

• For details on operating the Job Box, refer to the following:

Printing Data Saved in the Printer (page 4-10)

5-42

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Basic Operation for Document Box

This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom

boxes.

Box List

Document List

The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name or as

thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

NOTE

In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon

privileges, refer to the following:

Editing Custom Box (page 5-44)

NOTE

You can select multiple documents by selecting the respective document checkboxes.

Custom Box

10:10Custom Box.

Box 01

Next >Menu

No Owner

1/1

0001

1 Opens the selected box.

2Select [Menu] to search for document boxes (box

names/box numbers), change the order of the display

(box names/box numbers/owners), register new

boxes, change boxes or delete boxes.

3 Displays the details for the selected box.

Box:s

10:10

2014101010574501

< Back PrintMenu

2014/10/10 09:40

2014101010574511

2014101010574521

2014101010574531

1/1

2014/10/10 09:50

2014/10/10 10:00

2014/10/10 10:10

Ready to print from Box.

Cancel

1 Selecting documents by checking checkboxes.

2Select [Menu] to print, move, Search (File Name), Edit

or delete documents, to select all or cancel all

selections or to change the order of the display (name

order/time order).

3 Display the details for the selected document.

4 A document can be searched for by document name.

5-43

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Creating a New Custom Box

Follow the steps below to create a new Custom Box.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2[Menu] > [Add]

2Create the Custom Box.

1Enter the box name > [Next]

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

2Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

NOTE

• To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.

• If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. For

this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password are set

as shown below.

• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations. They

cannot be performed with user privileges.

- Creating a box

- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Description

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box number can

be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you enter

0000, the smallest number available will be automatically assigned.

Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.

Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.

Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the

box. Entering a password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to

16 characters in both [Password] and [Confirm Password].

This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.

Usage

Restriction

The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction enter a

value for the storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by selecting [-],

[+] or number keys. You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000 (MB).

Auto File

Deletion

Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Select [On] to

enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter

the number of days for which documents are stored. You can enter any number

between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To disable automatic file deletion, select [Off].

Free Space Displays the free space on the box.

5-44

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

3Select [Save].

The Custom Box is created.

Editing Custom Box

Follow the steps below to edit a Custom Box.

1Display the screen.

Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2Edit the custom box.

1[Menu] > [Edit]

2Select the box you want to edit.

When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending on the

privileges of the logged in user.

Overwrite

Setting

Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new

documents are stored. To overwrite old documents, select [Permit]. To retain

old documents, select [Prohibit].

Delete after

Printed

Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To

delete the document, select [On]. To retain the document, select [Off].

*1 Displayed when the user login administration is enabled.

*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that

user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Privileges Settings that can be changed

Administrator Box Name

Box No.

Owner

Permission

Box Password

Usage Restriction

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

Item Description

5-45

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Deleting Custom Box

1Display the screen.

Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2 Delete the Custom box.

1 [Menu] > [Delete]

2 Select the box you want to delete.

3Select [Yes].

Storing Documents

Custom box stores the print data which is sent from a PC. For the operation of the printing from the PC, refer to the

following:

Printer Driver User Guide

User Box Name

Box Password

Permission

Auto File Deletion

Overwrite Setting

Delete after Printed

Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-43)

NOTE

• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to

that user.

• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.

Privileges Settings that can be changed

5-46

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

Printing Documents in Custom Box

The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2Select the box containing the document you want to print.

2Print the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to print by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2Select [Print].

3The print settings selection screen appears.

To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select

[Print As Is] > specify the number of copies > [OK].

Printing starts.

To change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings] and proceed to next step.

4Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

5Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected document begins.

Moving Documents in Custom Box

This function allows you to move documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes. The procedure for moving

documents is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2Select the box containing the document you want to move.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

Custom Box (Printing) (page 6-6)

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

5-47

Operation on the Machine > Using Document Boxes

2Move the documents.

1Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Menu] > [Move to Another Custom Box]

3Select the destination of move.

4[Select This Folder] > [Yes]

The selected document is moved.

Deleting Documents in Custom Box

The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Custom Box] on the Home screen.

2Select the box containing the document you want to delete.

2Delete the document.

1Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.

The document is marked with a checkmark.

2[Menu] > [Delete]

3[Delete] > [Yes]

The document is deleted.

NOTE

To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

NOTE

If the box to which the document is to be moved is protected by a password, enter the

correct password.

NOTE

If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.

NOTE

•[Delete] is disabled until a document is selected.

• To deselect, select the checkbox again and remove the checkmark.

5-48

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Operating using Removable USB Memory

Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB

memory without having to use a computer.

The following file types can be printed:

• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)

• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)

• JPEG file

• XPS file

• OpenXPS file

• Encrypted PDF file

In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.

The following file types can be stored:

• PDF file format

• TIFF file format

• JPEG file format

• XPS file format

• OpenXPS file format

• High-compression PDF file format

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory

The procedure for printing documents stored in a removal USB memory is explained below.

1Plug the USB memory.

1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

NOTE

• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).

• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.

• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.

5-49

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying

files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].

Displays the removable memory screen.

2Print the document.

1Select the folder containing the file to be printed.

The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

2Select the file to be printed > [Print]

3Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc. as desired.

For the features that can be selected, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

Printing of the selected file begins.

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

NOTE

• 1,000 documents can be displayed.

• To return to a higher level folder, select [Back].

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-7)

5-50

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)

The procedure for storing scanned documents to a removal USB memory is explained below.

1Place the originals.

2Plug the USB memory.

1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.

2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying

files. Are you sure?" may appear. Select [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.

3Store the document.

1Select the folder where the file will be stored.

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.

NOTE

The maximum number of the storable files is 1,000.

Loading Originals (page 5-2)

NOTE

If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

5-51

Operation on the Machine > Operating using Removable USB Memory

2Select [ ].

3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

For the features that can be set, refer to the following:

4Press the [Start] key.

The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.

Check the USB Memory Information

You can check the USB memory information.

1In the removable memory screen, select [Menu] > [Memory

Information].

2 Once you confirm the information, select [End].

Removing USB Memory

Follow the steps below to remove the USB memory.

1Display the screen.

Select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.

2[Menu] > [Remove Memory]

Select [OK], and remove the USB memory after "Removable Memory can be safely removed."

is displayed.

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) (page 6-7)

IMPORTANT

Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

NOTE

USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.

Device/Communication (page 7-11)

Removable Memory

10:10Document Box.

7-9-2.JPG

11-3-3.JPG

PrintMenu

1/1

< Back

6-1

Using Various Functions

This chapter explains the following topics:

Functions Available on the Machine .................................................................................................................. 6-2

About Functions Available on the Machine .............................................................................................. 6-2

How to Select Functions .......................................................................................................................... 6-2

Copy ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-2

Send ........................................................................................................................................................ 6-4

Custom Box (Printing) .............................................................................................................................. 6-6

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................................................. 6-7

Functions ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-9

Original Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-9

Paper Selection ..................................................................................................................................... 6-10

Original Orientation ................................................................................................................................. 6-11

Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................................................................. 6-12

Collate/Offset ......................................................................................................................................... 6-12

Staple ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-13

Paper Output ......................................................................................................................................... 6-15

Density ................................................................................................................................................... 6-16

Original Image ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16

EcoPrint ................................................................................................................................................. 6-17

Color Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 6-18

Color Balance ........................................................................................................................................ 6-19

Hue Adjustment ..................................................................................................................................... 6-20

Sharpness .............................................................................................................................................. 6-21

Contrast ................................................................................................................................................. 6-21

Background Density Adj. (Background Density Adjustment) ................................................................. 6-22

Saturation .............................................................................................................................................. 6-22

Prevent Bleed-through ........................................................................................................................... 6-23

Zoom ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-23

Combine ................................................................................................................................................ 6-25

Duplex .................................................................................................................................................... 6-27

Continuous Scan ................................................................................................................................... 6-28

Job Finish Notice ................................................................................................................................... 6-29

File Name Entry ..................................................................................................................................... 6-29

Priority Override ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30

Quiet Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 6-30

Skip Blank Page .................................................................................................................................... 6-30

Duplex (2-sided Original) ....................................................................................................................... 6-31

Sending Size .......................................................................................................................................... 6-32

File Format ............................................................................................................................................. 6-33

File Separation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-36

Scan Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6-36

E-mail Subject/Body .............................................................................................................................. 6-36

FTP Encrypted TX ................................................................................................................................. 6-37

Delete after Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-37

Storing Size ............................................................................................................................................ 6-38

Encrypted PDF Password ...................................................................................................................... 6-38

JPEG/TIFF Print .................................................................................................................................... 6-39

XPS Fit to Page ..................................................................................................................................... 6-39

6-2

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Functions Available on the Machine

About Functions Available on the Machine

This machine provides the various functions available.

How to Select Functions

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will

be shown as a list.

Copy

For details on each function, see the table below.

Function key Description Reference

page

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size. page 6-10

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-23

Density Adjust density. page 6-16

Duplex Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided

originals.

page 6-27

Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. page 6-25

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-18

Functions Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-30

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. page 6-11

Mixed Size Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes. page 6-12

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-15

Staple Staples printed documents. page 6-13

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-17

Functions

Original Size

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Off

Quiet Mode

Collate

1/5

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to copy. (Full Color)

Copy Copies

Paper

Selection

Zoom Density

Duplex Combine Color

Selection

1-sided>>1-sided

A4 100% Normal 0

Full ColorOff

Functions

10:10

Favorites

Function

key

6-3

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Hue Adjustment Adjust the color (hue) of images. page 6-20

Color Balance Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. page 6-19

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-21

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. page 6-21

Background Density

Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. page 6-22

Prevent Bleed-through Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. page 6-23

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-30

Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. page 6-22

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. page 6-28

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-29

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-29

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. page 6-30

Functions Description Reference

page

6-4

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Send

To configure the settings for functions, select [Functions].

For details on each function, see the table below.

Functions Description Reference

page

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-18

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-30

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. page 6-33

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. page 6-11

Mixed Size Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes. page 6-12

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. page 6-31

Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. page 6-32

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends

the files.

page 6-36

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-36

Density Adjust density. page 6-16

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-21

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. page 6-21

Background Density

Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. page 6-22

Prevent Bleed-thru Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. page 6-23

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-30

FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-23

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one

job.

page 6-28

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-29

E-mail Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. page 6-36

Ready to send. (FullColor)

Functions

File Format

PDF

10:10

Original Size

1-sided

Full Color

Color Selection

Quiet Mode

1/7

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Off

Send Dest. :

Recall Check

E-mail

One Touch Key Address Book Ext Address Book

FAXFolder

Functions

10:10

1/2

Favorites

Ready to send. (FullColor)

6-5

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-29

FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. page 6-37

FAX Delayed

Transmission

Set a send time. Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

FAX Direct

Transmission

Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory. Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling Transmission stored in the

polling box.

Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

FAX TX Report Print a report of FAX transmission results. Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation

Guide.

Functions Description Reference

page

6-6

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Custom Box (Printing)

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will

be shown as a list.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Function key Description Reference

page

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size. page 6-10

Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-28

Delete after Print Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete. page 6-37

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-30

Functions Description Reference

page

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-15

Staple Staples printed documents. page 6-13

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. page 6-30

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-29

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-29

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-17

Ready to print from Box.

Functions

Priority Override

Off

10:10

File Name Entry

doc

Off

Job Finish Notice

EcoPrint

1/1

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Ready to print from Box.

Print Copies

Paper

Selection

Collate Duplex

Delete

afterPrint

Quiet

Mode

Off

A4 Off 1-sided>>1-sided

Off

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Function

key

6-7

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Removable Memory (Store File, Printing Documents)

To configure the settings for functions, select the function key. By selecting [Functions], other selectable functions will be

shown as a list.

For details on each function, see the table below.

Store File

Function key Description Reference

page

File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted. page 6-33

Duplex Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original. page 6-31

Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. page 6-36

Density Adjust density. page 6-16

File Name Entry Adds a file name. page 6-29

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-18

Functions Description Reference

page

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-30

Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. page 6-9

Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction. page 6-11

Mixed Size Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes. page 6-12

Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. page 6-38

Original Image Select original image type for best results. page 6-16

Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. page 6-21

Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image. page 6-21

Background Density

Adj.

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers. page 6-22

Prevent Bleed-through Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original. page 6-23

Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank

pages and prints only pages that are not blank.

page 6-30

Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. page 6-23

Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. page 6-28

Ready to store in Box. (FullColor)

Functions

Original Size

10:10

Original Orientation

Top Edge on Top

Off

Mixed Size Originals

1/4

Add/Edit

Shortcut

Quiet Mode

Off

Ready to store in Box. (FullColor)

Store File

File

Format

Duplex Scan

Resolution

Density File Name

Entry

Normal 0

PDF 1-sided 300x300dpi

doc

Functions

10:10

Cancel

Color

Selection

Full Color

Function

key

6-8

Using Various Functions > Functions Available on the Machine

Printing Documents

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-29

File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the

files.

page 6-36

Function key Description Reference

page

Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size. page 6-10

Collate Offsets the output by page or set. page 6-12

Duplex Print a document on both sides of the paper. page 6-28

Quiet Mode Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing. page 6-30

Color Selection Select the color mode setting. page 6-18

Functions Description Reference

page

Paper Output Specify the output tray. page 6-15

Staple Staples printed documents. page 6-13

EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. page 6-17

Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. page 6-29

Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. page 6-30

Encrypted PDF

Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data. page 6-38

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. page 6-39

XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing

XPS file.

page 6-39

Functions Description Reference

page

6-9

Using Various Functions > Functions

Functions

On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.

Printing:

Sending:

Storing:

Original Size

Specify the original size to be scanned.

Select [Auto (for DP)], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the original size.

Item Value Description

Auto (for DP) ―Automatically detect the original size.

Inch Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Metric A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom original size, refer to the following:

Custom Original Size (page 8-11)

Select from special standard sizes and

custom sizes.

NOTE

Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) (page 8-11)

Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size original.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-10

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Selection

Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.

Select from [1] (Cassette 1) to [4] (Cassette 4) to use the paper contained in that cassette.

If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.

To select [MP tray], select [Paper Size] and [Media Type], and specify the paper size and the media type. The available

paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

NOTE

• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-8)

• Cassettes 2 to 4 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Item Value Description

Paper Size Inch Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement*1, Executive, Oficio II

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Metric A4*1, A5*1, A6*1, B5*1, B6*1, Folio*1,

216 × 340 mm

Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom*2

*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size, refer to the following:

Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)

Select from special standard sizes and custom

sizes.

Size Entry Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Enter the size not included in the standard size.*3

When you have selected [Size Entry], use [+]/[-]

or the numeric keys to set the sizes of "X"

(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).

*3 The input units can be changed in System Menu. For details, refer to the following:

Measurement (page 8-20)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

Media type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*4,

Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*4, Letterhead*4, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1-8*4

*4 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

NOTE

• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as default.

Multi Purpose Tray (page 8-9)

• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a confirmation screen

appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and select [

Continue

] to start copying.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-11

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.

To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.

•Duplex

• Combine

• Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].

Item Image

Top Edge on Top

Top Edge on Left

NOTE

The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.

Original Orientation (page 8-16)

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original Original orientation

6-12

Using Various Functions > Functions

Mixed Size Originals

Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Supported Combinations of Originals

Legal and Letter (Folio and A4)

Collate/Offset

Offsets the output by page or set.

Without Optional Sheet Finisher*

(Value: [Off] / [On])

* Collate Only

With Optional Sheet Finisher

(Value: [Off] / [Collate Only] / [Offset Each Page] / [Offset Each Set])

NOTE

This function requires the optional Sheet Finisher.

Innner Finisher (page 11-24)

Item Image Description

Collate Only Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of copies as

required according to page number.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-13

Using Various Functions > Functions

Staple

Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.

Offset Each

Page

Printed copies are collated and output as individual pages

separately.

Offset Each

Set

Printed copies are collated and output as individual set separately.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Offset are Legal, Oficio II, Letter, Folio, A4, 16K and 216×340mm.

NOTE

This function requires the optional Sheet Finisher.

For details on paper sizes and numbers of sheets that can be stapled, refer to the following:

Innner Finisher (page 11-24)

Item Value Description

Staple Off

1 staple Select the staple position. For details on original orientation

and staple position, refer to the following:

Original Orientation and Staple Position (page 6-14)

2 staple

Others 1 staple (Top Left)

1 staple (Top Right)

2 staples (Left)

2 staples (Top)

2 staples (Right)

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction. Select [Original Orientation] to choose

orientation of the originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top

Edge on Left]. Then select [OK].

Item Image Description

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-14

Using Various Functions > Functions

Original Orientation and Staple Position

Mixed Size Stapling

Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width, the output can be stapled. The size of sheets that can be

stapled together is Letter and Legal. Up to 30 sheets can be stapled.

Image Original Orientation

Original Print results

Top Edge on

Top

Top Edge on

Left

NOTE

• Two position staple is not available for long edge paper orientation.

• Two position staple is not available for B5 paper.

NOTE

When performing Mixed Size Stapling, refer to the following:

Mixed Size Originals (page 6-12)

6-15

Using Various Functions > Functions

Paper Output

Specify the output tray.

With Optional Job Separator

With Optional Mailbox

NOTE

This function requires the optional Job Separator or Mailbox.

The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.

Paper Output (page 8-18)

Item Description

Inner tray Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.

Job Separator Tray Delivery to the Inner Job Separator.

Item Description

Inner tray Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.

Tray A, Tray 1 to 5 Delivery to tray A, tray 1 to 5 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.

When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for the output

destination, the output destination is automatically changed to the tray A.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-16

Using Various Functions > Functions

Density

Adjust density.

Adjust density selecting [-4] (Lighter) to [+4] (Darker).

Original Image

Select original image type for best results.

Copying/Printing

Item Description

Text+Photo*1

*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text + Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.

Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

Graphic/Map*2

*2 This function is displayed while copying.

Best for graphics and maps.

Printer Output*2 Best for documents printed on this machine originally.

Others Original Image Text+Photo Select to bring out text and markings made with a highlighter pen.

Reproduces the color of the highlighter pen to the extent possible.

Photo

Text

Graphic/Map

Printer Output

Highlighter

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-17

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending/Storing

EcoPrint

EcoPrint saves toner when printing.

Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not required.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.

Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.

Text Best for documents that are mostly text.

Light Text/Fine Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or diagrams.

Text (for OCR)*1

*1 This function is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Black & White]. For details, refer to the following:

Color Selection (page 6-18)

Scanning produces an image that is suitable for OCR.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

6-18

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Selection

Select the color mode setting.

Copying

Printing

Sending/Storing

Item Description

Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether documents are color or black and white.

Full Color Prints documents in full color.

Black & White Prints documents in black and white.

Single Color Cyan Specify one of the colors and produce copies in that color regardless of original

type.

Magenta

Yellow

Red

Green

Blue

Item Description

Full Color Prints documents in full color.

Black & White Prints documents in black and white.

Item Description

Auto (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Grayscale.

Auto (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white, and

scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in Black and

White.

Full Color Scans the document in full color.

Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.

Black & White Scans the document in black and white.

Copy

Send

Print from

USB

Scan to

USB

6-19

Using Various Functions > Functions

Color Balance

Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

Example:

Item Description

Off

On Cyan Select [ ] or [ ] on each side of the color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to adjust

each color.

Magenta

Yellow

Black

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

Copy

More MagentaOriginalLess Magenta

6-20

Using Various Functions > Functions

Hue Adjustment

Adjust the color (hue) of images.

Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative

copies.

Item Description

Off

All Adjust hue for all colors.

Select [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.

Individual Select individual colors to adjust the hue.

Select [

Red

], [

Yellow

], [

Green

], [

Cyan

], [

Blue

] or [

Magenta

] and then select [ ] or [ ] to adjust the hue.

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.

These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.

Copy

When adjusting yellow to

more green, blue to more

magenta (the part)

Original

When adjusting yellowish-red

to more yellow, bluish-cyan to

more blue (the part)

6-21

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.

When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward

"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns

appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.

Item Description

[+1] to [+3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.

[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.

*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Item Description

[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.

[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original More SharpLess Sharp

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Original HigherLower

6-22

Using Various Functions > Functions

Background Density Adj. (Background Density

Adjustment)

Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.

This feature is used with full color and auto color. Background Density Adjustment is disabled if Auto Color detects black

and white originals.

If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the ground color, select [Manual] and adjust the

density of the ground color.

Saturation

Adjust the color saturation of the image.

Item Description

Off Does not adjust the ground color.

Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.

Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.

NOTE

This feature is used with full color and auto color. Saturation is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white originals.

Item Description

[-1] to [-3] (Grayish) Results in paler color.

[+1] to [+3] (Vivid) Results in more vivid color.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

OriginalGrayish Vivid

Results in paler color. Results in more vivid color.

6-23

Using Various Functions > Functions

Prevent Bleed-through

Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Zoom

Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.

Copying

The following zoom options are available.

Auto

Adjusts the image to match the paper size.

Standard Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

Others

Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 400% Max.

200%

141% A5 >> A4

100%

90% Folio>>A4

70%

50%

25% Min.

Inch Models 400% Max.

200%

129% Statement>>Letter

100%

78% Legal>>Letter

64% Letter>>Statement

50%

25% Min.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Metric Models 115% B5 >> A4

86% A4 >> B5

129% Statement>>Letter

78% Legal>>Letter

64% Letter>>Statement

Inch Models 141% A5 >> A4

115% B5 >> A4

90% Folio>>A4

86% A4 >> B5

70% A4 >> A5

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

A4: 141%

A6: 70%

6-24

Using Various Functions > Functions

Zoom Entry

Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or

select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.

Sending/Storing

Item Description

100% Reproduces the original size.

Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.

NOTE

To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.

Paper Selection (page 6-10)

Sending Size (page 6-32)

Storing Size (page 6-38)

6-25

Using Various Functions > Functions

Combine

Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.

You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.

The following types of the boundary lines are available.

Item Value Description

Off ―Disables the function.

2 in 1 ―Copy the original with the default setting. For the default settings,

refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-16)

4 in 1 ―

Others Combine Off,

2 in 1 (L to R/T to B),

2 in 1 (R to L/B to T),

4 in 1 (Right then Down),

4 in 1 (Left then Down),

4 in 1 (Down then Right),

4 in 1 (Down then Left)

Select the page layout of scanned originals.

Border Line None,

Solid Line,

Dotted Line,

Positioning Mark

Select the boundary line type.

Original

Orientation

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan

correct direction.

Copy

None Dotted LineSolid Line Positioning Mark

6-26

Using Various Functions > Functions

Layout image

Item Image

2 in 1 L to R/T to B

R to L/B to T

4 in 1 Right then Down

Left then Down

Down then Right

Down then Left

NOTE

• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode are A4, A5, B5, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Oficio II, and 16K.

• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

6-27

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex

Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.

The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided

Two-sided to One-sided

Two-sided to Two-sided

Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an odd

number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.

The following binding options are available.

A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides

are not rotated.

B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the second sides are

rotated 180 degrees. Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing

the same orientation when turning the pages.

Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.

The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.

• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180 degrees.

Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.

NOTE

The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode are A4, B5, A5, Legal, Letter, Executive, Statement,

Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, Folio, ISO B5, and 16K.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Original Copy

ghi

def

abc

ghi

abc

def

ghi

abc

def

Original Copy

6-28

Using Various Functions > Functions

Copying

Prints 1-sided originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided originals to 1-sided. Select the binding orientation for original and finished

documents.

When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.

After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying.

Printing

Print a document on both sides of the paper.

Continuous Scan

Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job.

Originals will be scanned continuously until you select [Finish Scan].

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Value Description

1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.

1-sided>>2-sided ―Copy the original with the default setting. For the default

settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-16)

2-sided>>1-sided ―

2-sided>>2-sided ―

Others Duplex 1-sided>>1-sided,

1-sided>>2-sided,

2-sided>>1-sided,

2-sided>>2-sided

Select the desired duplex option.

Binding in Original*1

*1 Displayed when [2-sided>>1-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".

Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of originals.

Binding in Finishing*2

*2 Displayed when [1-sided>>2-sided] or [2-sided>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".

Left/Right, Top Select the binding orientation of copies.

Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction.

Item Description

1-sided Disables the function.

2-sided Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the left

or right.

2-sided Prints a 2-sided document so that the sheets are aligned properly for binding on the top.

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

1~10

1~30

11~20

21~30

6-29

Using Various Functions > Functions

Job Finish Notice

Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.

Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the

machine to finish.

File Name Entry

Adds a file name.

Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status

using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Enter the file name (up to 32 characters), and select [Next].

To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. To add both, select [Job No. & Date

and Time] or [Date and Time & Job No.].

NOTE

PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Command Center RX (page 2-46)

E-mail can be sent to a single destination.

Item Description

Off Disables the function.

On Displays the destination list.

Add a Destination

To add a new destination, select [Menu] > [Add].

•Address Book: Select the notification destination from the address book and select [OK].

•Ext. Address Book*1: Select the notification destination from the external address book.

•Address Entry: Enter the e-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128 characters)

and select [OK].

•My Address*2: Uses the e-mail address of the logged in user.

*1 For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:

Command Center RX User Guide

*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.

Check the Destination

To display details for the destinations, select [ ].

Delete the Destination

To delete the selected destination, select [ ].

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Send

Scan to

USB

6-30

Using Various Functions > Functions

Priority Override

Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.

The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Quiet Mode

Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.

Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each function, such as copying and sending.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Skip Blank Page

When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and prints only pages that are

not blank.

When set to [High], the level at which blank paper is recognized is higher.

The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the

document.

Select [Low], [Middle] or [High] in [On].

NOTE

• This function is not available if current job was an override.

• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage.

NOTE

• The processing speed will be slower than normal when in Quiet Mode.

• This cannot be used when [Prohibit] is set for "Specify for Each Job".

Specify for Each Job (page 8-42)

NOTE

The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank pages.

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Copy

Print from

Box

Print from

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Copy

Send

Scan to

USB

6-31

Using Various Functions > Functions

Duplex (2-sided Original)

Select the type and orientation of the binding based on the original.

Sample image

Item Value Description

1-sided ―Disables the function.

2-sided ―Set when using a 2-sided sheet original that will be bound on

the left or right.

Others Duplex 1-sided,

2-sided (Binding Left/Right),

2-sided (Binding Top)

Select the binding orientation of originals.

Original

Orientation*1

*1 Displayed when [2-sided (Binding Left/Right)] or [2-sided (Binding Top)] is selected in "Duplex".

Top Edge on Top,

Top Edge on Left

Select the orientation of the original document top edge to

scan correct direction.

Value Image

2-sided Binding Left/

Right

Binding Top

Send

Scan to

USB

6-32

Using Various Functions > Functions

Sending Size

Select size of image to be sent.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size.

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 6-9), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 6-23) are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Item Value Description

Same as Original Size ―Automatically sends the same size as the

original.

Metric A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Inch Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2

Select from special standard sizes and custom

sizes.

Original size and sending size are the same different

Original Size (page 6-9) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Sending Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-23) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you can send

the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Send

6-33

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Format

Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be adjusted.

Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].

When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.

If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.

Item Value Description

PDF ―Set the file format selected.

The image quality and PDF/A settings will be the default

settings. For the default settings, refer to the following:

Function Defaults (page 8-16)

High Comp. PDF ―

TIFF ―

JPEG ―

XPS ―

OpenXPS ―

Others File Format PDF, High Comp. PDF, TIFF,

JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS

Select the image file format.

Image Quality*1

*1 Displayed when [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".

Compression Ratio Priority,

Standard, Quality Priority

Set the quality level for High Compression PDF.

Image Quality*2

*2 Displayed when something other than [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".

1 Low (High Comp.) to 5 High

(Low Comp.)

Set the image quality.

PDF/A*3

*3 Displayed when [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] is selected for "File Format".

Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b Set PDF/A-1 format type.

Encryption*3 ―You can use PDF encryption functions.

PDF Encryption Functions (page 6-34)

NOTE

If encryption is enabled, PDF/A settings cannot be specified.

Send

Scan to

USB

6-34

Using Various Functions > Functions

PDF Encryption Functions

If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and

editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

Select [Others], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF] in [File Format], and select [Encryption].

Items that can be set vary depending on the setting selected in [Compatibility].

When [Acrobat 3.0 and later, Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and

then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and

then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Page Layout except extracting

Pages

Can change the page layout except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

6-35

Using Various Functions > Functions

When [Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption Level: High(128-bit)] is selected

Item Value Description

Password to Open Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and

then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select [OK].

Password to Edit/Print

Document

Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.

Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and

then select [Next].

Enter the password again for confirmation, and select [OK].

When you have entered the password to edit/print

document, you can specifically limit the operation.

Printing Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.

Allowed (Low Resolution only) Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.

Changes Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.

Inserting/Deleting/Rotating

Pages

Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF

file.

Commenting Can only add commenting.

Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of

the PDF file.

Copying of Text/Images/

Others

Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

6-36

Using Various Functions > Functions

File Separation

Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.

(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])

Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.

Scan Resolution

Select fineness of scanning resolution.

(Value: [600 × 600dpi] / [400 × 400dpi Ultra] / [300 × 300dpi] / [200 × 400dpi Super] / [200 × 200dpi Fine] /

[200 × 100dpi Normal])

E-mail Subject/Body

Adds subject and body when sending a document.

Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.

NOTE

A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.

NOTE

The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes and

longer send times.

NOTE

The subject can include up to 60 characters, and the body can include up to 500 characters.

Send

Scan to

USB

Send

Scan to

USB

Send

6-37

Using Various Functions > Functions

FTP Encrypted TX

Encrypts images when sending via FTP.

Encryption secures the document transmission.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Delete after Print

Automatically deletes a document from the box once printing is complete.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

NOTE

Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure

Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.

Command Center RX User Guide

Send

Print from

Box

6-38

Using Various Functions > Functions

Storing Size

Select size of image to be stored.

Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size.

Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 6-9), Storing Size, and Zoom (page 6-23) are related to each other. For details, see the table below.

Encrypted PDF Password

Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data.

Enter the Password, and select [OK].

Item Value Description

Same as Original Size ―Store an image the same size as the original.

Metric A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Inch Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Others 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,

Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2

Select from special standard sizes and custom

sizes.

Original Size and the size you wish to

store as are the same different

Original Size (page 6-9) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.

Storing Size Select [Same as Original Size]. Select the desired size.

Zoom (page 6-23) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].

NOTE

When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the image

as the actual size (No Zoom).

NOTE

For details on entering the password, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Scan to

USB

Print from

USB

6-39

Using Various Functions > Functions

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

(Value: [Paper Size] / [Image Resolution] / [Print Resolution])

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

(Value: [Off] / [On])

Item Description

Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.

Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.

Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.

Print from

USB

Print from

USB

7-1

7 Status/Job Cancel

This chapter explains the following topics:

Checking Job Status .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2

Details of the Status Screens ................................................................................................................... 7-3

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-7

Checking Job History ......................................................................................................................................... 7-8

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ........................................................................................ 7-9

Sending the Log History .......................................................................................................................... 7-9

Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................. 7-10

Pause and Resumption of Jobs ............................................................................................................. 7-10

Canceling of Jobs .................................................................................................................................. 7-10

Device/Communication ..................................................................................................................................... 7-11

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-12

7-2

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Job Status

Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens

The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing

Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs.

The following job statuses are available.

Displaying Status Screens

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job you want to check.

Select either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled

Job] to check the status.

Status Display Job status to be displayed

Print Job Status • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

• Job Report/List

Send Job Status • FAX transmission

• E-mail

• Folder transmission

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Status • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

Scheduled Job • Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission

Print Job Status Screen (page 7-3)

Send Job Status Screen (page 7-4)

Store Job Status Screen (page 7-5)

Scheduled Job Status Screen (page 7-6)

7-3

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Details of the Status Screens

Print Job Status Screen

NOTE

You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.

Display Status/Log (page 8-21)

This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job

Job from Document Box

FAX reception

E-mail reception

Data from removable memory

Application

Report/List

3Job Name Job Name or file name

4[ ] Select this key for the job for which you wish to display detailed

information.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-7)

5Status Status of job

(Number of copies printed)/(Total number of copies to be printed):

Printing

Processing: The status before starting to print.

Waiting: Print Waiting

Pause: Pausing print job or error

Canceling: Canceling the job

6[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

7[Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By selecting this key again, the printing jobs

will be resumed.

Print Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000892010092514...

Cancel Close

5/23

1/1

0089

Pause All

Print Jobs

doc0000892010092515... Waiting

doc0000892010092520... Waiting

7-4

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Send Job Status Screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

Sending Job E-mail

Sending Job Folder (SMB/FTP)

Sending Job Application

Multi Sending

3Job Name Job Name or file name

4[ ] Select this key for the job for which you wish to display detailed

information.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-7)

5Status Status of job

Processing: The status before starting sending such as during scanning

originals

Sending: Sending

Waiting: Waiting Sending

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

6[Menu] Selecting this key displays [Priority Override]. This function allows you

to give a particular fax job priority.

Select the fax job you wish to send immediately > [Menu] >

[Priority Override]

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

Send Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

0123456

Cancel CloseMenu

Process

1/1

0005

7-5

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Store Job Status Screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Printer

Storing Job FAX

3Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

4[ ] Select this key for the job for which you wish to display detailed

information.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-7)

5Status Status of job

Processing: The status before starting to save such as during scanning

originals

Storing: Storing Data

Canceling: Canceling the job

Pause: Pausing the job

6[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

Store Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000162010082913...

Cancel Close

Storing

1/1

0016

345

7-6

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Scheduled Job Status Screen

No. Item Description

1Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job FAX

3Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of broadcast

items)

4[ ] Select this key for the job for which you wish to display detailed

information.

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (page 7-7)

5Start Time Time to start the scheduled job

6[Menu] Selecting this key displays [Start Now]. Select the job you wish to send

immediately > [Menu] > [Start Now]

7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and select this key.

Scheduled Job

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

A OFFICE

Cancel Close

12:00

1/1

0014

345

7-7

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job Status

Checking Detailed Information of Jobs

Check the detailed information of each job.

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select [ ] for the job for which you wish to display detailed information.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of information. More detailed information can be

checked if a white item is selected.

In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [Status/Destination].

2To exit from the detailed information, select [End].

NOTE

When you have logged in as a user, you can only check your own jobs. When you have logged in as administrator,

you can check all jobs.

Details of the Status Screens (page 7-3)

Send Job Status

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

0123456

Cancel CloseMenu

Process

1/1

0005

7-8

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Checking Job History

Check the history of completed jobs.

Available Job History Screens

The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.

The following job histories are available.

NOTE

• Job history is also available by Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer from the computer.

Command Center RX User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.

Display Status/Log (page 8-21)

• This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.

Command Center RX User Guide

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Print Job Log • Copy

• Printer

• FAX reception

• E-mail reception

• Printing from Document Box

• Job Report/List

• Printing data from removable memory

• Application

Send Job Log • FAX

• E-mail

• Folder

• Application

• Multiple destination

Store Job Log • Scan

•FAX

• Printer

FAX Job Log FAX System 11 Operation Guide

7-9

Status/Job Cancel > Checking Job History

Displaying Job History Screen

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job you want to check.

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories

Check the detailed information of each history.

1Display the screen.

2Check the information.

1Select [ ] for the job for which you wish to check details.

Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.

2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].

Sending the Log History

You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically

whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Sending Log History (page 8-7)

NOTE

To check the information of the next/previous page, select [ ] or [ ].

Print Job Log

10:10Status/Job Cancel.

doc0000112010081817...

Completed

1/3

0011

doc0000102010081815... Canceled0010

doc0000092010081815... Completed0009

doc Error0008

7-10

Status/Job Cancel > Job Operation

Job Operation

Pause and Resumption of Jobs

Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.

Printing is paused.

When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs

A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.

1Display the screen.

Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].

3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

7-11

Status/Job Cancel > Device/Communication

Device/Communication

Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the device you wish to check.

The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Scanner"

The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is

displayed.

"Printer"

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or

printing are displayed.

"FAX"

• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.

•Select [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving.

"Removable Memory (USB Memory)"

• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are

displayed.

•Select [Menu] > [Format] to format external media.

•Select [Remove] to safely remove the external media.

"USB Keyboard"

The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.

"Network Connection Status"

The network connection status appears.

"Option Network Connection Status"

The connection status of an optional network interface kit appears.

"Wireless Network"

The connection status of the Wireless Network Interface Kit is displayed.

"SSD"

The status of the optional SSD is displayed.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

IMPORTANT

When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.

7-12

Status/Job Cancel > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner

and Paper (Paper/Supplies)

Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.

1Display the screen.

1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.

2Select the device you wish to check.

2Check the status.

The items you can check are described below.

"Toner Status"

The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste

toner box.

"Paper Status"

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper

source. The amount of paper remaining is shown in levels.

"Staple"

You can check the status of staples

8-1

Setup and Registration

(System Menu)

This chapter explains the following topics:

System Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

Operation Method .................................................................................................................................... 8-2

System Menu Settings ............................................................................................................................. 8-3

Language ................................................................................................................................................. 8-5

Report ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-5

User Property ........................................................................................................................................... 8-7

Cassette/MP Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................... 8-8

Common Settings .................................................................................................................................. 8-10

Home ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-22

Copy ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-22

Send ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-23

Document Box ....................................................................................................................................... 8-24

FAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-24

Application ............................................................................................................................................. 8-24

Internet ................................................................................................................................................... 8-25

Address Book/One Touch ...................................................................................................................... 8-25

User Login/Job Accounting .................................................................................................................... 8-26

Printer .................................................................................................................................................... 8-26

System/Network ..................................................................................................................................... 8-29

Date/Timer/Energy Saver ...................................................................................................................... 8-40

Adjustment/Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 8-42

8-2

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu

Configure settings related to overall machine operation.

Operation Method

System Menu is operated as follows:

1Display the screen.

Select the [System Menu/Counter] key.

2Select a function.

3Configure the settings.

Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.

1 Displays the System Menu items.

2 Scrolls up and down when the list of

values cannot be displayed in its

entirety on a single screen.

3 Displays setting items.

Select the key of a function to display

the setting screen.

4 Returns to the previous screen.

1 Selecting a value it to be accepted.

2 Returns to the original screen without

making any changes.

3 Accepts the settings and exits.

NOTE

• In order to change settings that require administer privileges, you must log in with

administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each

function screen to immediately change the settings.

System Menu/Counter.

System Menu

Quick Setup Wizard

10:10

Language

Report

Counter

1/5

System Menu/Counter.

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

Date/Time

10/10/2014 10:10

10:10

Date Format

DD/MM/YYYY

+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo

Time Zone

Auto Panel Reset

1/4

< Back

System Menu/Counter.

Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone

-12:00 International Date Line West

10:10

-09:00 Alaska

-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11

-10:00 Hawaii

1/24

Cancel OK

8-3

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System Menu Settings

This section explains the functions that can be configured in System Menu. To configure the settings, select the item in

System Menu and select the setting item. For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description Reference Page

Quick Setup Wizard The Quick Setup Wizard configures Fax, Network and Energy Saver

settings.

page 2-28

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel. page 8-5

Print Report Configure settings for printing reports and histories. page 8-5

Admin Report Settings Refer to the FAX

System 11

Operation Guide.

Result Report Settings page 8-6

Sending Log History page 8-7

Counter This counts the number of pages printed or scanned. page 2-43

User Property Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of

that information.

page 8-7

Cassette 1 (to 4) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 4). page 8-8

Multi Purpose Tray Select type of paper in multi purpose tray. page 8-9

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). page 8-10

Sound Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. page 8-10

Original Settings Configures settings for originals. page 8-11

Paper Settings Configures settings for paper. page 8-13

Function Defaults Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed

or the [Reset] key is selected.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting

the frequently-used values as defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

page 8-16

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. page 8-18

Error Handling Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. page 8-19

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from

Document Box, computers, and FAX RX data.

page 8-18

Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White

setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.

page 8-19

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. page 8-20

Low Toner Alert Level Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to

order a toner when the toner is running low.

page 8-20

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters. page 8-20

USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. page 8-20

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job. page 8-20

Offset One Page Documents Set whether one-page documents are sorted. page 8-21

Format SSD Format an optional SSD. page 8-21

Format SD Card Format an optional SD/SDHC memory card. page 8-21

Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. page 8-21

Function Key Usage Configure settings for function key on the operation panel. page 8-22

8-4

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Home Configure settings for Home screen. page 8-22

Copy Configures settings for copying functions. page 8-22

Send Configures settings for sending functions. page 8-23

Document Box Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address

Box and Polling Box.

page 8-24

FAX Configures settings for fax functions.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

—

Application Configure settings for Application. page 8-24

Internet Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application. page 8-25

Address Book/One Touch Configures Address Book and One Touch Key settings.

Address Book:

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-22)

One Touch Key:

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-

27)

page 8-25

User Login/Job Accounting Configures settings related to machine management.

User Login:

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Job Accounting:

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-31)

—

Printer Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application

software screen. However, the following settings are available for

configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

page 8-26

Network Configures network settings. page 8-29

Optional Network Configure settings for the optional network interface kit. page 8-35

Wireless Network Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit. page 8-35

Network Interface (Send) Specify the network interface card to be used for the send function, the

network authentication and connecting to external address book.

page 8-36

Interface Block Setting This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with

external devices such as USB hosts or optional interfaces.

page 8-37

Security Level The Security Level setting is primarily a menu option used by service

personnel for maintenance work. There is no need for customers to use

this menu.

—

Restart Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with

any unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

page 8-37

RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set. page 8-38

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme

based on the application in which you are using the equipment.

page 8-38

Data Security Configure settings for data stored in the optional SSD and machine's

memory.

page 8-39

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine. page 8-39

Date/Timer/Energy Saver Configures settings related to the date and time. page 8-40

Adjustment/Maintenance Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance. page 8-42

Item Description Reference Page

8-5

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Language

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Language]

Report

Print reports to check the machine settings and status.

Default settings for printing the result reports can also be configured.

Report Print

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Report Print]

Item Description

Language Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Item Description

Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,

available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.

Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network interface

firmware version, network address and protocol.

Status Page

Network Status Page

8-6

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Admin Report Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Admin Report Settings]

Configure settings for fax functions.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Result Report Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Result Report Settings]

Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.

Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.

Accounting Report Prints the accounting report, allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered on

the machine.

Sub Address Box List Prints the report on the FAX function.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX List (Index)

FAX List (No.)

Outgoing FAX Report

Incoming FAX Report

Optional Network Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including optional

network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional network interface kit or Wireless Network Interface

Kit is installed.

Item Description

Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.

E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is

complete.

Value: Off, On, Error Only

FAX*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Canceled before

Sending*2

*2 When "E-mail/Folder" and "FAX" are set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.

Value: Off, On

Recipient Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.

Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination

RX Result Report*1 FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Job Finish Notice Setting Attaches sent images to job finish notices.

Value: Do Not Attach Image, Attach Image

Item Description

8-7

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Sending Log History

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]

User Property

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

Allows you to view information about logged in users and edit some of that information.

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Item Description

Sending Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.

Auto Sending

This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever a set

number of jobs has been logged.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories. The setting range is 1 to 16.

Destination Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can be set.

Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.

Value: Up to 60 characters

Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.

Value: Include, Exclude

8-8

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Cassette/MP Tray Settings

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes and multi purpose tray.

Cassette 1 (to 4)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 4)]

Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 4.

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Size Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.

Values: Metric, Inch

Metric Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Values: A4*1, A5*1, A6*1, B5*1, B6*1, Folio*1, 216×340mm

*1 Paper size is automatically detected in the cassette.

Inch Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Values: Letter*1, Legal*1, Statement*1, Executive, Oficio II

Other Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom*2

*2 The custom paper sizes are set for each cassette.

Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)

Media type*3

*3 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

When a paper weight that cannot be loaded in the cassette is set for a media type, that media type does not appear.

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (60 - 105 g/m2), Recycled,

Preprinted*4, Bond, Color, Prepunched*4, Letterhead*4, Envelope,

Thick (106 - 163 g/m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8

*4 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

8-9

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Multi Purpose Tray

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Multi Purpose Tray]

Select paper size and media type for the multi purpose tray.

Item Description

Paper Size Metric Select from the Metric standard sizes.

Values: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm

Inch Select from the Inch series standard sizes.

Values: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II

Other Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.

Values: 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2

, Custom*1

*1 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper size.

Custom Paper Size (page 8-13)

Media Type*2

*2 To change to a media type other than "Plain".

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

Select the media type.

Values: Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Rough, Transparency, Vellum (60 to 105 g/m2),

Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*3, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*3,

Letterhead*3, Envelope, Thick (106 to 220 g/m2), Coated, High Quality,

Custom 1-8

*3 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead.

Special Paper Action (page 8-14)

8-10

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Common Settings

Configures overall machine operation.

Default Screen

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]

Sound

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]

Item Description

Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).

Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory,

Sub Address Box*1, Polling Box*1, Favorites, Status, Application Name*2

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

*2 The running application will be displayed.

Application (page 5-13)

Item Description

Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

Volume Set the buzzer volume level.

Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected.

Value: Off, On

Job Finish Emit a sound when a print job is normally completed.

Value: Off, On, FAX Reception Only*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.

Value: Off, On

Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.

Value: Off, On

USB Keyboard Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.

Value: Off, On

FAX Speaker Volume*1 FAX System 11 Operation Guide

FAX Monitor Volume*1 FAX System 11 Operation Guide

8-11

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Original Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Original Settings]

Configure settings for originals.

Item Description

Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.

The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.

Value

Metric

X: 50 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 50 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 1.97 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 1.97 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) Select whether to automatically detect originals of the document processor.

Auto Detect Select whether to enable automatic detection of original size.

Value: off, on

System of Units Select inch or metric for the unit of original size detection.

Value: Metric, Inch

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Legal/OficioII/

216 x 340 mm

As Legal, OficioII and 216 x 340 mm are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic

detection.

Value: Legal, OficioII, 216 x 340 mm

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

When [System of Units] is set to [Metric], this function will not be displayed.

Horizontal

8-12

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Default Original Size (Platen) Set the default original size.

Value

Off

Metric: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm

Inch: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II

Others: 16K

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [Off], this function will not be displayed.

Default Original Size Set the default original size.

Value

Metric: A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216×340mm

Inch: Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, OficioII

Others: 16K

NOTE

When [Auto Detect] is set to [On], this function will not be displayed.

Item Description

8-13

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Settings

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Settings]

Configure settings for paper.

Item Description

Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.

One custom paper size is set for each paper supply source. The custom size option is

displayed on the screen to select paper size.

Cassette 1 Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassette 1.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 92 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.62 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Cassette 2 (to 4) Size Register the custom paper size to be used in Cassettes 2 to 4.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 92 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 3.62 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

MP Tray Size Register the custom paper size to be used in the multi purpose tray.

Value

Metric

X: 148 to 356 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Y: 70 to 216 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Inch

X: 5.83 to 14.02" (in 0.01" increments)

Y: 2.76 to 8.50" (in 0.01" increments)

X=Length, Y=Width

Horizontal

Horizontal Vertical

8-14

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Media Type Setting (page 8-15)

Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and multi purpose tray.

Value: Cassette 1 to 4, Multi Purpose Tray

NOTE

[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 4] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is installed.

[Cassette 2]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet) is installed.

[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) or large capacity paper feeder (2,000-

sheet) is installed.

[Cassette 4]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) is installed.

Paper Selection Set the default paper selection.

Value

Auto: Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as originals.

Default Paper Source: Select paper source set by "Default Paper Source".

Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper

Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is

selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the

specific size.

Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated,

High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Media for Auto (B&W)

Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or

the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the

combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the

print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed Priority].

If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority

Multi Purpose TrayCassetteFinishedPaperOriginal

8-15

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Media Type Setting

The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.

Each media type's default weight is indicated.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)Paper Weight Weight (g/m2)

Light 52 g/m² to 59 g/m² Heavy 1 106 g/m² to 128 g/m²

Normal 1 60 g/m² to 74 g/m² Heavy 2 129 g/m² to 163 g/m²

Normal 2 75 g/m² to 90 g/m² Heavy 3 164 g/m² to 220 g/m²

Normal 3 91 g/m² to 105 g/m² Extra Heavy Transparencies

Media Type Default Media Type Default

Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 3

Rough Normal 3 Prepunched Normal 2

Vellum Heavy 1 Letterhead Normal 2

Labels Heavy 2 Envelope Heavy 2

Recycled Normal 2 Thick Heavy 2

Preprinted Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2

Bond Normal 3 Coated Heavy 1

Cardstock Heavy 3 Custom 1 - 8 Normal 2

Item Description

Duplex Print Prohibit Duplex printing allowed.

Permit Duplex printing not allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters. Selecting

media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

8-16

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]

Item Description

File Format Select the default type of the files to be sent.

Value: PDF, High Comp. PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS

Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults.

Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left

Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate.

Value

Without optional Sheet Finisher: Off, On

With optional Sheet Finisher: Off, Collate Only, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set

File Separation Select the default file separation setting.

Value: Off, Each Page

Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.

Value: 600×600dpi, 400×400dpi Ultra Fine, 300×300dpi, 200×400dpi Super Fine,

200×200dpi Fine, 200×100dpi Normal

Color Selection (Copy) Set the default copying color mode setting.

Value: Auto Color, Full Color, Black & White

Color Select.(Send/Store) Select the default color mode for scanning documents.

Value: Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White

Original Image (Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Printer Output

Original Image (Send/Store) Set the default original document type for sending/storing.

Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (for OCR), Light Text/Line

NOTE

[Text (for OCR)] is only available when "Color Selection" is set to [Auto (Color/B & W)] or [Black

& White].

Background Density Adj.

(Copy)

Set the default Backgrnd Density (Copy).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

Background Density Adj.

(Send/Store)

Set the default Backgrnd Density (Send/Store).

Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)

EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.

Value: Off, On

Prevent Bleed-through (Copy) Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).

Value: Off, On

Prevent Bleed-through (Send/

Store)

Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank Page (Copy) Set the default Skip Blank Page (Copy) settings.

Value: Off, On

Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) Set the default Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) settings.

Value: Off, On

FAX TX Resolution FAX System 11 Operation Guide

8-17

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set.

Value: 100%, Auto

Continuous Scan (Except FAX) Set the continuous scan defaults.

Value: Off, On

Continuous Scan (FAX) FAX System 11 Operation Guide

File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and

Time and Job No. can also be set.

Value

File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time, Date and Time

& Job No.

E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the

scanned originals by E-mail.

Value

Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.

FTP Encrypted TX Set the default value for document encryption during transmission.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This setting is displayed when the secure protocol "SSL" setting is [On].

JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.

Value: Paper Size, Image Resolution, Print Resolution

XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.

Value: Off, On

Detail Settings —

Image Quality Set the default value for the image quality adjustment range when selecting the file format with

which to send and store images.

Value: 1 Low (High Comp.), 2, 3, 4, 5 High (Low Comp.)

PDF/A Set the default value for PDF/A when selecting the file format with which to send and store

images.

Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b

High Comp. PDF Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority

Blank Detection Level

(Copy)

Select the default Blank Detection Level (Copy) settings.

Value: Low, Middle, High

Blank Detection Level

(Send/Store)

Select the default Blank Detection Level (Send/Store) settings.

Value: Low, Middle, High

Item Description

8-18

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Paper Output

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]

Preset Limit

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Preset Limit]

Item Description

Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box, computers, and

FAX RX data.

Value:

Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine

Job Separator*1: Delivery to the Job Separator.

Tray A*2: Delivery to tray A of the Mailbox.

Tray 1 to 5: Delivery to trays 1 to 5 (tray 1 is the uppermost tray) of the optional Mailbox.

NOTE

When [Heavy 3] (164 g/m2 - ) or higher is set in Paper Weight and Mailbox (Option) is set for

the output destination, the output destination is automatically changed to a tray that can be

used.

FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

*1 Displayed only when the optional Job Separator is installed.

*2 Displayed only when the optional Mailbox is installed.

Item Description

Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.

Value: 1 to 999 copies.

8-19

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Error Handling

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]

Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.

Color Toner Empty Action

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Color Toner Empty Action]

Item Description

Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and media

types.

Value

1-sided: Printed in 1-sided

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Punch/Offset/Fold/Auto Image Rotation) is not

available for the selected paper size or media type.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Sheet Finisher.

Stapling Limit Error Set what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.

Value

Ignore: Printing continues without finishing.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE

Requires the optional Sheet Finisher.

Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded

in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or

multi-purpose tray.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Inserted Paper Mismatch Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match the

actual paper size that is fed.

Value

Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.

Item Description

Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for printing

once the color toner runs out.

Value: Stop printing, Print in Black & White

8-20

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Measurement

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]

Low Toner Alert Level

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert Level]

Keyboard Layout

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]

USB Keyboard Type

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [USB Keyboard Type]

Offset Documents by Job

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset Documents by Job]

Item Description

Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Value: mm, inch

Item Description

Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner when the

toner is running low.

This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor, SNMP Trap.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to 100% (in

1% increments).

Item Description

Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.

Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY

Item Description

USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.

Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German

Item Description

Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

8-21

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Offset One Page Documents

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset One Page Documents]

Format SSD

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Format SSD]

Format an optional SSD.

When an optional SSD is inserted into the printer for the first time, it must be formatted before use.

Format SD Card

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Format SD Card]

Format an optional SD/SDHC memory card.

A new SD card must be formatted before it can be used in the machine.

Display Status/Log

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]

Item Description

Offset One Page Documents Set whether one-page documents are sorted.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when an optional 1,000-Sheet Finisher is installed.

IMPORTANT

Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SSD.

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.

IMPORTANT

• Formatting will destroy any existing data on a storage device including a used SD card.

•

If you have installed application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD card.

Item Description

Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log.

Display Jobs Detail

Status

Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All

Display FAX Log*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Value: Show All, Hide All

8-22

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Function Key Usage

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Usage]

Home

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Home]

Configure settings for Home screen.

Editing the Home Screen (page 2-13)

Copy

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Copy]

Configures settings for copying functions.

Item Description

Function Key Usage Select whether to enable the [Copy] Key, [Send] Key, and [FAX] Key on the operation panel.

Copy Key Value: Disable, Enable

Send Key Value: Disable, Enable

FAX Key*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Value: Disable, Enable

Item Description

Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom

changes.

Value

Most Suitable Size: Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as Original Size: Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the

zoom.

Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic

zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.

Value: Off, On

Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved while

printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].

Value: Off, On

DP Read Action When the document processor is used, select the scanning operation for the document

processor.

Value

Speed Priority: Gives priority to scanning speed.

Quality Priority: Gives priority to image quality at a slightly slower scan speed.

8-23

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Send

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Send]

Configures settings for sending functions.

Item Description

Dest. Check before Send When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing

the [Start] key.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 Also applies when sending the fax.

Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered

destination.*1

Value: Off, On

Send and Forward Set whether to send the original to another destination and store it when sending images.

Forward Set the rule to send the original.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select rules to forward from [FAX]*2, [E-mail], [Folder (SMB)] and

[Folder (FTP)].

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. You can

check and edit the set address.

Follow the steps below to register the destination.

• Address Book

• Ext. Address Book

• Address Entry (E-mail)

• Address Entry (folder)

Specifying Destination (page 5-35)

Color TIFF Compression Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine.

Value: TIFF V6, TTN2

Default Screen Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.

Value: Destination, Address Book, Ext. Address Book, One Touch

New Destination Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.*1

Value: Prohibit, Permit

Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.*1

Value: Prohibit, Permit

8-24

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Document Box

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Document Box]

Configures settings related to the Custom Box, Job Box, Sub Address Box and Polling Box.

FAX

[System Menu/Counter] key > [FAX]

Configure settings for FAX.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Application

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Application]

Configure settings for Application.

Item Description

Custom Box Configure settings for Custom Box.

Add/Edit Box Creating a New Custom Box (page 5-43)

Default Setting Auto File Deletion Time

Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.

Sub Address Box*1

*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.

Quick Copy Job

Retention

To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Value: number between 0 and 300

NOTE

When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.

Deletion of Job

Retention

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and

Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been

saved for a set time.

Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week

NOTE

This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function

setting, temporary documents are deleted when the power switch is turned off.

Storage Media Select which storage media to use.

Value: SSD, SD Card

NOTE

This setting is not displayed if the optional SSD or SD card is not installed.

Polling Box*1 FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Item Description

Application You can install, activate, deactivate, and uninstall applications.

Application (page 5-13)

8-25

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Internet

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Internet]

Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.

Address Book/One Touch

Address Book

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]

Configure settings for address book.

Adding a Destination (Address Book) (page 3-22)

One Touch Key

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]

Configure settings for One Touch Key.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key (One Touch Key) (page 3-27)

Address Book Defaults

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book Defaults]

Print list

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Print list]

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Item Description

Proxy Specify the proxy settings.

Value: Off, On

Use Same Proxy Set whether or not the same proxy server is used for all protocols. If the same proxy server is

not used, select [Off].

Value: Off, On

HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

HTTPS Proxy Server Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when [Use Same Proxy] is [Off].

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

No Proxy Domains Set domains for which no proxy is used.

Value: (Enter the domain name.)

Item Description

Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.

Value: No., Name

Address Book Specify the default sort setting of the external address book.

8-26

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

User Login/Job Accounting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

Configure settings related to machine management.

Overview of User Login Administration (page 9-2)

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-31)

Unknown ID Job (page 9-46)

Printer

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Printer]

Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following

settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

Item Description

Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of

printers.

Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)

NOTE

When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.

When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.

Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL

and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to

print.

Value: PCL6

KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the

error report is output.

Value: Off, On

Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white.

Value: Color, Black & White

EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded

printing is not a problem.

Value: Off, On

Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when

printing.

Value

Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever size

is in the paper source.

Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.

Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge

Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Value: 1 to 999 copies

Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].

Value: Portrait, Landscape

8-27

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a line for

an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch). This

setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.

Value: Off, On

Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no

information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the

preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and

495 seconds.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH).

Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF

CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character

code 0DH).

Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR

Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No. & Job

Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].

User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.

Value: Off, On

MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in the

paper feed.

Value

Off: The printer driver settings are followed.

Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then

the paper feed will be from the MP tray.

Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray

regardless of what is set in the printer driver.

Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are

specified.

Value

Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Item Description

8-28

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Auto cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette #." (# is a

cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multi purpose tray.", and stops printing.

Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.

To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the desired paper

source.

When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other cassette

contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.

Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes longer time.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT

Gloss Mode is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as the paper

type setting.

Cassette/MP Tray Settings (page 8-8)

Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper.

To reduce curl, try using thicker paper.

Item Description

8-29

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

System/Network

Configures machine system settings.

Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network]

Configures network settings.

Host Name

TCP/IP Settings

Item Description

Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-50)

Item Description

TCP/IP Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.

Value: Off, On

IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is set to

[On].

DHCP Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.

Value: Off, On

Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.

Value: Off, On

IP Address Set the IP address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.

Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.

Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.

Value: ###.###.###.###

NOTE

When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be entered.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-30

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

IPv6 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is [On].

IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)/Prefix Length] after restarting

the network.

Manual Setting Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6).

Value

IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-

digit hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

Prefix Length: 0 to 128

Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit

hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

To enter [Default Gateway], set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].

RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)/Prefix Length] after restarting

the network.

DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].

Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)/Prefix Length] after restarting the

network.

Bonjour Select whether or not to use Bonjour.

Value: Off, On

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-31

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Protocol Detail ―

NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

LPD Select whether or not to receive documents using LPD.*1

Value: Off, On

SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether or not to send e-mail using SMTP.

Value: Off, On

POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether or not to receive e-mail using POP3.

Value: Off, On

FTP Client

(Transmission)

Select whether or not to send documents using FTP. To use the FTP Client, set the protocol to

[On]. The default port number is 21.

Value: Off, On

FTP Server (Reception) Select whether or not to receive documents using FTP.*1

Value: Off, On

SMB Client

(Transmission)

Select whether or not to send documents using SMB. To use the SMB Client, set the protocol to

[On]. The default port number is 445.

Value: Off, On

LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP.

Value: Off, On

SNMP Select whether or not to communicate using SNMP.*1

Value: Off, On

SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate using SNMPv3.*1

Value: Off, On

HTTP Select whether or not to communicate using HTTP.*1

Value: Off, On

HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate using HTTPS.*1 *2

Value: Off, On

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in "Secure Protocol".

Secure Protocol (page 8-33)

IPP Select whether or not to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to

[On], and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] on IPP Security under

Security Settings from the Command Center RX. The default port number is 631.*1 *2

Value: Off, On

IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over SSL. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On].

The default port number is 443.*1 *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

RAW Port Select whether or not to receive documents using RAW Port.*1

Value: Off, On

8-32

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

WSD Scan

WSD Print

Enhanced WSD

Item Description

ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the ThinPrint protocol, set the protocol to [On]. The

default port number is 4000.*1 *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

This function is displayed only when the optional ThinPrint Option is activated.

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in "Secure Protocol".

Secure Protocol (page 8-33)

ThinPrintOver

SSL

To use the ThinPrint over SSL protocol, set [ThinPrintOverSSL] and [SSL] to [On].

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is the self-

certificate of the machine.

Command Center RX User Guide

Item Description

WSD Scan Select whether or not to use WSD Scan.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

Item Description

WSD Print Set whether to use our proprietary web services. WIA driver, TWAIN driver and Network FAX

driver use this Enhanced WSD web service.*1

Value: Off, On

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

Item Description

Enhanced WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-33

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Enhanced WSD (SSL)

IPSec

Secure Protocol

LAN Interface

Item Description

Enhanced WSD (SSL) Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1 *2

Value: Off, On

NOTE

Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN, and Network FAX driver.

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or the network for the machine.

*2 Set "SSL" to [On] in "Secure Protocol".

Secure Protocol (page 8-33)

Item Description

IPSec Make this setting when you use IPSec.

Value: Off, On

Item Description

SSL Select whether or not to use SSL.

Value: Off, On

IPP Security Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].

Value: IPP/IPP over SSL, IPPoverSSL only

HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].

Value: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTPS Only

SMTP Security Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the SMTP

server. This setup is available when SSL is [On].

Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS

POP3 Security (User 1) Select the communication protocol according to the type of security employed by the POP3

server. This setup is available when POP3 is [On].

Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS

POP3 Security (User 2)

POP3 Security (User 3)

Item Description

LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-34

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Ping

Restart Network

Proxy

Item Description

Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address of the

destination is possible.

NOTE

If [Network Interface (Send)] is set to [Optional NIC], this item is not displayed.

Item Description

Restart Network Restarts the network.

Item Description

Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.

Value: Off, On

Use the Same Proxy

Server for All Protocols

Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols.

Value: Off, On

Proxy Server (HTTP) Set a proxy server (HTTP).

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Proxy Server (HTTPS) Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy Server for All

Protocols" is [Off].

Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)

Do Not Use Proxy for

Following Domains

Set domains for which no proxy is used.

Value: (Enter the domain name.)

8-35

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Optional Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]

Configure settings for the optional network interface kit.

Basic

Wireless Network

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Wireless Network]

Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.

Setup

NOTE

This menu is displayed when the optional network interface kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Host Name

Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command Center RX.

Changing Device Information (page 2-50)

TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.

TCP/IP Settings (page 8-29)

IPSec (page 8-33)

LAN Interface Select the LAN Interface type.*1

NOTE

Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T

This function is displayed when the optional network interface kit is installed.

*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.

MAC Address Filter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.

Operation Guide for the optional network interface kit

Value: Off, On

Restart Network Restarts the network card of the device.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Connection Status

When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed, you can check the wireless LAN status.

Quick Setup Wizard

If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless network setup,

connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.

Available Network Select access points to which the machine can be connected, Enter the Preshared Key and

start a connection.

Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be configured using

the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection is started by pressing

the push button on the access point.

NOTE

The push button method supports only the WPS.

PIN Code Method

(Device)

Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access point. The

PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.

PIN Code Method

(Terminal)

Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the access point.

8-36

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Network Interface (Send)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network Interface (Send)]

Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.

Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.

NOTE

Up to 32 characters can be entered.

Connection Mode Set the connection mode.

Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure

NOTE

Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an access point. This

method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.

Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.

Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.

Value: 1 to 11

Network Authentication Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home page from a

computer.

Value: Open, Shared, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1

Encryption Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the WEP key or

the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network Authentication setting.

Select [Data Encryption].

When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]

Value: Disable, WEP

When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]

Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Preshared Key

NOTE

If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. Up to 26 characters can be entered.

If [

TKIP

], [

AES

] or [

Auto

] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value in 8 to 64 characters.

*1 Not displayed if you selected [Ad Hoc] for "Connection Mode".

*2 Not displayed if you selected [WPA2-PSK] for "Network Authentication".

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional network interface kit or Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.

Item Description

Network Interface (Send) Specify the network interface card to be used for the send function, the network authentication

and connecting to external address book.

Value: Standard, Optional NIC

Item Description

8-37

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Interface Block Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]

This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional

interfaces.

Security Level

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]

Restart

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart]

Item Description

USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).

Value: Unblock, Block

USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].

Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.

Value: Unblock, Block

NOTE

If the machine has two optional interface slots, you can set this feature for each slot.

Optional Interface 2

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Security Level Specify the security level.

Value

Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.

High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.

Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be

changed from external command.

Item Description

Restart Restart the CPU without turning the power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable

operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

8-38

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

RAM Disk Setting

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [RAM Disk Setting]

Optional Memory

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Memory]

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional SSD is installed.

Item Description

RAM Disk Setting A RAM disk can be created and its size can be set.

Creating a RAM disk makes it possible to print from a Job Box.

Value

RAM Disk Setting: Off, On

RAM Disk Size: The setting range varies depending on the amount of memory installed

and the option memory usage setting.

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

Item Description

Optional Memory When optional memory is installed, select the memory allocation scheme based on the

application in which you are using the equipment.

Value: Printer Priority, Normal, Copy Priority

IMPORTANT

After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.

8-39

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Data Security

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]

Configure settings for data stored in the optional SSD and machine's memory.

Optional Function

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]

Item Description

SSD Initialization Initialize data saved on an optional SSD.

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional SSD is installed and the optional Data Security Kit

is activated.

Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.

• Address Book

• Favorites

• System settings

• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data

• Transmission histories

• Data saved in Custom Box

• Optional applications

IMPORTANT

Data saved in an application or SD card cannot be erased. To erase data on an SD card,

you must format the SD card.

Format SD Card (page 8-21)

NOTE

Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.

Before executing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other cables.

Do not turn off the power switch while sanitizing the data. If the power is turned off during data

erasing, erasing will be executed automatically when the power is restored, however, complete

erasure cannot be guaranteed.

Item Description

Optional Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

8-40

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Date/Timer/Energy Saver

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]

Configures settings related to the date and time.

Item Description

Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-

mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.

Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to

59), Second (00 to 59)

Setting Date and Time (page 2-23)

NOTE

If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be

able to use the application.

Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day

Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you select

a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.

Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the

default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Value: Off, On

NOTE

The time allowed to elapse before the panel is reset is set with the following:

Panel Reset Timer (page 8-40)

Panel Reset Timer

If you select [

] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].

Low Power Timer

Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.

Value

For Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Low Power Mode (page 2-26)

8-41

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Item Description

Sleep Rules (models for

Europe)

Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• Card Reader*1

•FAX

•Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.

Sleep Level (models except for

Europe)

Select the sleep level.

Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than Quick Recovery

mode.

Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver

NOTE

This function will not be displayed when the optional network interface kit is installed.

Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:

•Network

• Card Reader*1

•FAX

•Application

Value: Off, On

NOTE

When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, the ID card cannot be

recognized.

Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.

Value

For Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)

Except for Europe: 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)

Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be taken by

the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time

elapses.

Value: Off, On

Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically

clearing errors.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

NOTE

This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].

Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to

Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.

Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)

Unusable Time*2

FAX System 11 Operation Guide.

Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in "System/Network".

Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)

*1 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

8-42

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Adjustment/Maintenance

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]

Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

Item Description

Quiet Mode Settings Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.

Quiet Mode Set the Quiet Mode. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Value: Off, On

Specify for Each Job It is possible to set the use of Quiet Mode for each job, such as copying and sending. Set

whether or not to permit the setting for each job.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Density Adjustment Adjust density.

Copy Adjust copy density.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.

Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a document

box.

Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)

Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.

Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them in the

Document Box.

Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)

Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether

the original is color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result

in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number

of originals being identified as black and white.

Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)

Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the image, when

the document processor is used.

Value

Off: No correction performed. Select this when you want to reproduce fine lines in the

original more clearly than with [On (Low)].

On (Low): Correction performed.

On (High): Select this item if a streak remains after using [On (Low)]. The reproduction

of fine lines on the original may become lighter than when using On (Low).

Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)

Color Registration When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may

occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to

resolve color drift.

Color Registration Procedure (page 10-33)

8-43

Setup and Registration (System Menu) > System Menu

Calibration Cycle Set the calibration cycle.

Value

Auto: Automatically sets the cycle for calibration.

Short: Priority is given to image quality.

Standard: Balances image quality and print speed.

Long: Priority is given to print speed.

Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed

output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the

original tone.

Tone Curve Adjustment (page 10-38)

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 3 minutes. The time

required may vary depending on the operating environment and this process may take time.

Drum Refresh (page 10-39)

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is

done.

Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color.

Calibration (page 10-40)

Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical lines from the printout.

Laser Scanner Cleaning (page 10-40)

Service Setting Settings for machine maintenance and inspection. This menu is primarily used by service

technicians to perform maintenance.

Item Description

9-1

User Authentication and

Accounting (User Login,

Job Accounting)

This chapter explains the following topics:

Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-2

Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-3

Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-4

Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-4

Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-5

Changing User Properties ....................................................................................................................... 9-8

User Login Administration for Printing ................................................................................................... 9-12

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN ........................................................................................... 9-13

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA ............................................................................................... 9-14

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC .................................................................................. 9-15

Local Authorization ................................................................................................................................ 9-16

Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. ........................................................................................................................ 9-20

Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-23

Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................................................ 9-25

ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-28

PIN Login Settings ................................................................................................................................. 9-29

Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-30

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-30

Overview of Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................ 9-31

Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-32

Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-33

Setting an Account ........................................................................................................................................... 9-34

Adding an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-34

Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-35

Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-36

Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-37

Job Accounting for Printing .................................................................................................................... 9-38

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-39

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-40

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-41

Configuring Job Accounting ............................................................................................................................. 9-42

Default Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 9-42

Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-43

Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-44

Using Job Accounting ...................................................................................................................................... 9-45

Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-45

Unknown ID Job ............................................................................................................................................... 9-46

9-2

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration

Overview of User Login Administration

User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user

name and password for user authentication to login.

Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified

only by the "Machine Administrator".

Managing the Job Account from PC

In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.

To Manage the Users to Print from PCs

Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.

Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning

TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-13)

Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning

WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA (page 9-14)

Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC

FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC (page 9-15)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

UserA

1Enable User Login

Administration

(page 9-3)

2Set the user

(page 9-5)3Enter the login user name and

password and execute the job

(page 9-30)

User A

User B

User C

1Set the User Login Administration

on the printer driver (page 9-12)2Print

9-3

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration

Enabling User Login Administration

This enables user login administration. Select one of the following authentication methods:

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [User Login]

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].

Select [Off] to disable user login administration.

If you select [Network Authentication], enter the host name (64 characters or less) and domain

name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server. Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as

the server type.

When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.

2"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears.To display a new

function on the Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you want to

display the icon of registered function.

Item Descriptions

Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the

machine.

Network Authentication

User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored

in Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• Selecting [Domain] displays the domain registration list.

• Enter the domain name. Up to 10 domain names can be registered.

Available Functions to Display on Desktop (page 2-14)

NOTE

If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.

• Network Authentication setting of the machine

• User property of the Authentication Server

• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server

If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator

registered in the local user list and correct the settings.

9-4

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Setting User Login Administration

This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.

Authentication Security

If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.

User Account Lockout Setting

You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [User Account Lockout Settings]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.

Value: Off, On

Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is

applied.

Value

Number of Retries until Locked:

Specify how many login retries are allowed until

the account is locked out.

(1 to 10 times)

Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be locked out

until it is unlocked.

(1 to 60 minutes)

Lockout Target Specify the extent to which the account lockout

is applied. You can select from [All] or [Remote

operations from outside the operation panel.

Locked out Users List Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the

user in the list, and selecting [Unlock].

NOTE

This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.

9-5

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Adding a User (Local User List)

This adds a new user. You can add up to 100 users (including the default login user name).

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Local User List] > []

NOTE

By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already stored.

Each user's properties are:

Machine Administrator

User Name: DeviceAdmin

Access Level: Machine Administrator

Administrator

User Name: Admin

Access Level: Administrator

* Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).

It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your

security.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-6

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

Select [Next].

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

3Check the user information.

Change or add information as needed.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

name cannot be registered.

Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Item Descriptions

User Name*1

*1 Mandatory at user registration.

Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user

name cannot be registered.

for confirmation and select the [OK] key.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her

account name, can login without entering the account ID.

Overview of Job Accounting (page 9-31)

NOTE

Select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search (ID)] to search by account name

or account ID.

Select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)] to sort the account list.

E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be

automatically selected for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.

Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.

ID Card

Information

Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is

activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

9-7

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

4Select [Save].

A new user is added on the local user list.

Item Descriptions

My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut settings for

each user. Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.

Local

Authorization*1

Set usage authority for each user.

The following restriction items are available:

Printer:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Printer (Full Color):

Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for the printer.

Copy:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Copy (Full Color):

Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for copies.

Copy (Single Color):

Select whether or not to reject usage of single-color print functions for

copies.

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict.:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX Transmission*2:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing in Memory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

*1 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.

Local Authorization (page 9-16)

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished

asking if you will configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select

[Yes]. If you select [No], you will return to the user list screen.

For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:

Simple Login Settings (page 9-25)

9-8

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Changing User Properties

User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user

access privilege.

For a user with administrator rights who logs in

User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Local User List]

2Change the user properties.

Changing user properties

1Select [ ] for the user to edit.

NOTE

To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator authority.

You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (User Name)] and [Sort (Login User

Name)].

• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (User Name)] or

[Search (Login User Name)].

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Admin

1/1

End

Admin

DeviceAdmin 5000

User A User A

User Login S... - Local User List

9-9

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

3[Save] > [Yes]

The user information is changed.

Deleting a user

1Select the user to delete.

2[] > [Yes]

The selected user will be deleted.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)

NOTE

The default user with machine administrator rights cannot be deleted.

9-10

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)

These users can partially change their own user properties including user name, login password, E-mail address, and

Simple Login.

Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present

status.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Property]

2Change the user properties.

1Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)

Item Description

User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be

entered.

can be entered.

Access Level Displays the user's access level.

Account Name Displays the account where the user belongs.

E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be

entered.

If you log in as a user and [New Destination Entry] is set to

[Prohibit], you can only check the e-mail address.

Authorization Rules Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.

NOTE

[Job Accounting] shows the account name set for the logged in user

and the usage restrictions that are set for that account.

This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For

information on job accounting, refer to the following:

Job Accounting Access (page 9-33)

ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.

NOTE

This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication

Kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in

Network Authentication, and logged in with the user account

certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.

9-11

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Select [Save].

The user information is changed.

Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.

NOTE

This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off] or the

user is not registered in Simple Login.

My Panel Register the language, default screen and shortcut for each user.

Once registered, the setting will be applied simply by login. Network

users are not displayed.

Item Description

9-12

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

User Login Administration for Printing

It is possible to manage the users that print on this machine from a PC.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same

User login for every print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and

password for each print job.

[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is

attempted.

[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be

displayed when attempting a printing. The user name and password stored in the Login user name

list needs to be entered. The user name and password must be entered each time a printing is

attempted.

[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the Windows

user name is searched in the "Login user names" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If

the name is not registered, the printing will be canceled for users with only user authority. If the user

has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name and password will appear.

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

9-13

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

3Click [OK].

Managing the Users to Scan Using TWAIN

It is possible to manage the users that scan using TWAIN.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver

Setting].

TWAIN Driver screen appears.

2Select the machine,and click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Search] in charms, [Apps], and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-14

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users to Scan Using WIA

It is possible to manage the users that scan using WIA.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search].

Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure the settings.

1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User

Name and Password.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and then [Settings], and enter "Scanner" in the

search box. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-15

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Managing the Users that Send Faxes from a PC

It is possible to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] on the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the User Login Administration.

[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to

use the same User login for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type

the name and password for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed

when attempting a transmission. The user name and password must be entered each time a

transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

9-16

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Local Authorization

Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Local User Authorization]

2Select [Off] or [On].

NOTE

When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-17

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group Authorization Settings

Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.

Group Authorization

Use the group authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Group Authorization Set.] > [Group Authorization]

2Select [On].

NOTE

To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method in

"Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Detail (page 8-31)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-18

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Group List (Up to 20)

The table below explains the group information to be registered.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

Item Descriptions

Group ID*1

*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you are using Windows Server 2008, check

Attribute Editor tab of user properties. If you are using Windows Server 2000/2003, check ADSIEdit. ADSIEdit is a support tool

included on the installation DVD for Windows Server OS (under \SUPPORT\TOOLS).

Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).

Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).

Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.

Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.

Printer (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of color print functions for the printer.

Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.

Copy (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only full-color print functions for copies.

Copy (Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only color print functions for copies.

Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict. Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.

FAX Transmission*2

*2 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.

Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.

Storing in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-19

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2[User Login Setting] > [Group Authorization] > [Group List] > []

2Configure the settings.

1Enter the group ID > [Next]

2Enter the group name > [Next]

3Select the group access privileges > [Next]

4Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

A new group is added on the group list.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

Group Authorization Set. - Group List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

Others

1/1

End

9-20

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Guest Authorization Set.

When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are

allowed to use.

Enabling Guest Authorization

Enable the guest authorization.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Authorization]

2Select [On].

NOTE

To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication/Logout] key must be

selected when logging in.

In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use

a different function, log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the

guest properties.

9-21

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Configuring Guest Property

The table below explains the user information to be registered.

Item Descriptions

User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).

The default setting is "Guest User".

Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.

Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.

If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other].

Authorization Rules Set usage authority for each user.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Printer:

Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.

Printer (Full Color):

Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited.

Copy:

Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.

Copy (Full Color):

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited.

Copy (Single Color):

Select whether or not use of the copy print function (single color) is prohibited.

Duplex Restriction:

Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.

Combine Restrict.:

Specify whether only Combine is allowed.

EcoPrint Restriction:

Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.

Send:

Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.

FAX TX Restriction*1:

Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.

Storing in Box:

Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.

Storing in Memory:

Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

9-22

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Property]

2Configure the settings.

Check the settings and change or add information as needed.

3Register the group.

Select [Save].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-23

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Obtain NW User Property

Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail

address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of

E-mail.

The table below explains the required information to be registered.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]

NOTE

To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the

authentication method in "Enabling User Login Administration". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Detail".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

Protocol Detail (page 8-31)

Item Descriptions

Server Name*1

*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the network

authentication.

Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server name is

not entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for Network

Authentication.

Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.

Name 1*2

*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server

(up to 32 characters).

Name 2*3

*3 "Name 2" can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in "Name 2", and if the value of

displayName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears as

"Mike Smith Sales".

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server

(up to 32 characters).

E-mail Address*4

*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.

Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 32

characters).

Authentic at Type*5

*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".

Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the setting,

restart the system or turn the power off and then on.

Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-24

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Configure the settings.

1[Server Name] > Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address > [OK]

2[Port] > Enter the LDAP port number > [OK]

3[Name 1] > Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed > [OK]

4Similar to steps 3, set [Name 2].

If you set the server type to "Kerberos", select [Authentication Type] and set the

authentication method.

6[E-mail Address] > Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address > [OK]

Select [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to wait before time-out.

Select [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time > [OK] > [OK]

9-25

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

Simple Login Settings

The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to

use this functionality.

Enabling Simple Login

Select whether or not simple login is enabled.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login]

2Select [On] or [Off].

Simple Login Setup

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login Setup]

NOTE

• For user registration, refer to the following:

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)

• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "Enabling User Login Administration".

Enabling User Login Administration (page 9-3)

• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-26

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

2Enter the user information.

1Select the key to which you want to register a user.

2Select [].

3To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users,

select [Network User].

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

Specifying the user from local users

Select the user to be set for simple login.

Specifying the user from network users

Select [Keyboard] for "Login User Name" and "Login Password", enter the information of the

user to be registered, and select [OK].

If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the

"Domain" and select the domain where the user is registered.

Select [Next].

4Enter the user name to be displayed, and select [OK].

NOTE

• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] and [Sort (Login User Name)].

• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search

(Login User Name)].

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

10:10

System Menu/Counter.

1/3

Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup

End

None None None

Add - Network User

10:10

Keyboard

< Back Next >Cancel

System Menu/Counter.

9-27

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

5[Password Login] > [On] or [Off] > [Icon]

6Select the user icon to be displayed and select [OK].

3Register the user.

Select [Save].

9-28

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

ID Card Settings

If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[User Login Setting] > [ID Card Settings]

2Configure the settings.

The following settings can be selected.

NOTE

This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item Descriptions

Keyboard Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by

keyboard is allowed.

Value: Permit, Prohibit

Additional

Authentication*1

*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network

Authentication".

Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID

card.

Value: Off, Use Password

9-29

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration

PIN Login Settings

This sets whether or not to login using PIN.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2Selet [PIN Login].

2Configure the settings

1Select [Off] or [On].

2Select [OK].

NOTE

This setting is only displayed when [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication method and the

server type is set to [Ext.] in "Network Authentication".

Optional Applications (page 11-6)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-30

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration

Using User Login Administration

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use

this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the login user name and login

password entry screen.

9-31

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of Job Accounting

Overview of Job Accounting

Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each

account.

To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the

printer driver on the PC.

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN

To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (page 9-39)

Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA

To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer

connected to the machine.

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (page 9-40)

Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver

on the PC.

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (page 9-41)

The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.

100 400 200

A: 00000001

1Enable job

accounting. (page

9-32)

3Enter the assigned account

ID when performing the

job. (page 9-30)

4Count the number of pages

copied, printed, scanned

and faxed.

2Setting an

account. (page

9-34)

A: 00000001

B: 00000002

C: 00000003

100 400 200

1Set Job Accounting for the PC on

the network by using the printer

driver. (page 9-38)

2Execute printing. 3Count the number of

pages printed.

9-32

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Enabling Job Accounting

Enable job accounting. Use the procedure below.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting]

2Select [On].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To disable job accounting, select [Off].

• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed

and the screen to enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the

Account ID.

9-33

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting

Job Accounting Access

Set the job accounting access.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]

2Configure the settings.

Select [Local] or [Network].

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-34

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Setting an Account

You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.

Adding an Account

Up to 100 individual accounts can be added. The following entries are required.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List] > []

2Enter the account information.

1Enter the account name > [Next]

2Enter the account ID > [Next]

3Activate or deactivate restriction.

4Select [Save].

A new account is added on the Account List.

Item Descriptions

Account Name Enter the account name (up to 32 characters).

Account ID Enter the account ID as many as eight digits (between 0 and 99999999).

Restriction This prohibits printing/scanning or restricts the number of sheets to load.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-35)

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

For details on entering characters, refer to the following:

Character Entry Method (page 11-8)

NOTE

Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account

ID.

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-35)

9-35

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Restricting the Use of the Machine

This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.

The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Print Count".

Copy/Print Count (page 9-42)

Restriction Items

"Individual" selected for Copy/Printer Count"Split" selected for Copy/Printer Count

"Total" selected for Copy/Printer Count

Applying Restriction

Restriction can be applied in the following modes:

Item Descriptions

Copy (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.

Copy (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.

Copy (Single Color) Limits the number of pages used for single-color copying.

Printer (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.

Printer (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for color printing.

Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Print (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Print (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.

Print (Single Color) Limits the number of pages used for single-color printing.

Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Limits the number of sheets sent by fax. This is displayed only on products with the

fax function installed.

Item Descriptions

Off No restriction is applied.

Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.

Reject Usage Restriction is applied.

9-36

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Editing an Account

This changes the registered account information.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]

2Edit an account.

1Select [ ] for the account name you wish to edit.

2Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.

3[Save] > [Yes]

The account information is changed.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• To search by name or login user name, select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search

(ID)].

• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] and [Sort (ID)].

Job Accounti... - Accounting List

10:10System Menu/Counter.

AAA

EndMenu

1/1

00000001

9-37

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Deleting an Account

This deletes the account.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]

2Delete an account.

1Select the account name you wish to delete.

2[] > [Yes]

The account is deleted.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

9-38

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Printing

The number of jobs to be printed from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting Printer Driver

To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by

using the printer driver on the PC.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].

2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of

the printer driver.

3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.

2Set the Account ID.

[Use specific account ID]:

Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the entered

Account ID. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each print job.

[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a

printing. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when

attempting a printing. The Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to be entered. The Account

ID must be entered each time a printing is attempted.

[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID to be used

needs to be selected from the list.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

NOTE

For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:

Printer Driver User Guide

9-39

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN

The number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting TWAIN Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the

TWAIN Driver on the computer.

1Display the screen.

1Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver

Setting].

TWAIN Driver screen appears.

2Select the machine, click [Edit].

2Configure the settings.

1Click [User Authentication Settings].

2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Search] in charms, [Apps], and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].

9-40

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA

The number of jobs scanned by using WIA can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting WIA Driver

To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA

Driver on the computer.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search].

Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras

screen appears.

2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and press [Properties].

2Configure WIA Driver.

1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.

2Click [OK].

NOTE

In Windows 8, click [Search] in charms, and then [Settings], and enter "Scanner" in the

search box. Click [View scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners

and Cameras screen appears.

9-41

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an Account

Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a

Computer

The number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer can be managed by Job Accounting.

Setting FAX Driver

To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using

the FAX Driver on the computer.

1Display the screen.

1Click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].

2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select [Printing

preferences] from the resulting pull-down menu.

3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.

2Configure the settings.

1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.

2Set the Job Accounting.

[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the same

Account ID for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID

for each FAX job.

[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a

transmission. The Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.

3Click [OK].

NOTE

FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.

NOTE

In Windows 8, select [Settings] in charms on Desktop, and select [Control Panel], and

then [Devices and Printers].

9-42

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Configuring Job Accounting

Default Setting

Set the defaults for job accounting. To configure the settings, select the item in Default Setting and select the setting

item.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting]

For details on each function, see the table below.

Item Description

Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.

The table below describes the action taken.

Value

Immediately: Job stops when the counter reaches its limit. The next job will be

prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.

Subsequently: Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be

rejected.

Alert Only: Job continues while displaying an alert message.

Copy/Print Count You can select how the copying and printing page counts are shown - either the total of both or

each of copying and printing individually (Split). The selection may influence restriction on the

count and count method.

Value: Total, Individual

Restricting the Use of the Machine (page 9-35)

Print Accounting Report (page 9-44)

Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of sheets

used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.

The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for

[Copy/Print Count].

Copy/Print Count (page 9-42)

[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Copy (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.

Copy (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying.

Copy (Single Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color copying.

Printer (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.

Printer (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing.

Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*1

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count

Print (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.

Print (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing.

Print (Single Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for single-color printing.

Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).

FAX Transmission*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes.

9-43

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A

new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings] >

[Total Accounting] or [Each Job Account]

Total Accounting

This counts the number of pages for all accounts and resets the counts for those accounts together at the same time.

Each Job Account

This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account. When checking Each Job

Accounting, select the account for which you want to check the count.

Types of the counts are as follows.

Item Descriptions

Printed Pages Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages used. You can

also use [FAX]*1, [by Duplex] and [by Combine] to check the number of pages used.

*1 Displayed only when the optional FAX Kit is installed.

Copy (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white copying.

Copy (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for full-color copying.

Copy (Single Color) Displays the number of pages used for single-color copying.

Copy (Total) Displays the number of pages copied.

Printer (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white printing.

Printer (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for color printing.

Printer (Total) Displays the number of pages printed.

Copy/Printer (B/W) Displays the total number of pages used for black-and-white copying and printing.

Copy/Print. (Color) Displays the total number of pages used for full-color copying and printing.

Copy/Print. (Total) Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.

FAX Displays the number of pages received.

Total Displays the total number of pages used.

by Duplex Displays the number of pages printed in [1-sided] mode, [2-sided] mode, and the total pages

in both modes.

by Combine Displays the number of pages printed in [None] (no Combine) mode, [2 in 1] mode, [4 in 1]

mode, and the total pages in both modes.

Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as well as the

total number of pages scanned.

FAX TX Pages Displays the number of pages faxed.

FAX TX Time Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.

Counter Reset Resets the counter.

Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

9-44

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Configuring Job Accounting

Print Accounting Report

The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.

Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.

When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.

Use the procedure below to print a job accounting report.

1Prepare paper.

Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]

3Print the report.

[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]

Accounting report is printed.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password

and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. The factory

default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

ACCOUNT. REPORT

9-45

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using Job Accounting

Using Job Accounting

This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.

If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.

Use the procedure below to login and logout.

1In the account ID entry screen, enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select

[Login].

When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears

If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password

appears. Enter a login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the

account information, the account ID entry would be skipped.

2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.

Logout

When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication/Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.

NOTE

• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID

again.

• If the entered account ID does not match the registered ID, a warning beep will sound

and login will fail. Enter the correct account ID.

• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the

number of pages scanned.

Adding a User (Local User List) (page 9-5)

9-46

User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Unknown ID Job

Unknown ID Job

This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If the User

The setting items are as follows.

1Display the screen.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]

2Select [Unknown ID Job].

2Configure the settings.

Select [Permit] or [Reject].

Item Descriptions

Permit The job is permitted to be printed.

Reject The job is rejected (not printed).

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

10-1

10 Troubleshooting

This chapter explains the following topics:

Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning ................................................................................................................................................. 10-2

Cleaning Glass Platen ........................................................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor .......................................................................................... 10-2

Cleaning Slit Grass ................................................................................................................................ 10-3

Replace the toner container ................................................................................................................... 10-4

Replace the waste toner box ................................................................................................................. 10-7

Loading Paper ..................................................................................................................................... 10-10

Replacing Staples ................................................................................................................................. 10-11

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 10-13

Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................................ 10-13

Machine Operation Trouble ................................................................................................................. 10-13

Printed Image Trouble ......................................................................................................................... 10-16

Color printing trouble ........................................................................................................................... 10-19

Responding to Messages .................................................................................................................... 10-20

Adjustment/Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 10-33

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................. 10-33

Color Registration Procedure .............................................................................................................. 10-33

Tone Curve Adjustment ....................................................................................................................... 10-38

Drum Refresh ...................................................................................................................................... 10-39

Calibration ............................................................................................................................................ 10-40

Laser Scanner Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 10-40

Clearing Paper Jams ..................................................................................................................................... 10-41

Jam Location Indicators ....................................................................................................................... 10-41

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 10-43

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) .................................................................. 10-44

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (2000-sheet x 1) ................................................................ 10-46

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (500-sheet x 2) .................................................................. 10-48

Remove any jammed paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ........................................................................ 10-50

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ...................................................................................... 10-51

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2 ...................................................................................... 10-54

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (500-sheet x 2) ............................................................. 10-55

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (2000-sheet x 1) ........................................................... 10-56

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit .................................................................................... 10-57

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox .......................................................................................... 10-58

Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher ................................................................................ 10-59

Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor .................................................................... 10-60

Clearing a Staple Jam .................................................................................................................................... 10-62

Clearing a staple jam ........................................................................................................................... 10-62

10-2

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Regular Maintenance

Cleaning

Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.

Cleaning Glass Platen

Wipe the inside of the document processor and the glass platen with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild

detergent.

Cleaning inside of the Document Processor

Wipe the inside of the document processor with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol or mild detergent.

CAUTION

For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

IMPORTANT

Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.

10-3

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Cleaning Slit Grass

When using the document processor, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the dry cloth.

IMPORTANT

Do not use water, soap or solvents for cleaning.

NOTE

Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.

10-4

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replace the toner container

When toner runs out, the following messages will be displayed "Toner [C][M][Y][K] are empty." Make sure you have a

new toner container available for replacement.

When toner runs low, "Toner is low. [C][M][Y][K] (Replace when empty.)" appears in the touch panel. Make sure you

have a new toner container available for replacement.

Installation procedures of the toner container is same for every color. Here, we'll explain the yellow toner container, as

an example.

1Open the front cover.

2Unlock the toner container.

NOTE

• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may

cause image defects and product failure.

• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer

convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of new

products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify individuals, and is

only used anonymously for the above purposes.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-5

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

3Remove the toner container.

4Put used toner container into the plastic waste bag.

5Remove the new toner container from the box.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the points shown below.

10-6

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

6Tap the toner container.

7Shake the toner container.

8Install the toner container.

9Close the front cover.

NOTE

• If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.

• Return the exhausted toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

5~65~6 5~65~6

5~65~6

CLICK!

10-7

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replace the waste toner box

When the touch panel shows "Replace the waste toner box.", immediately replace the waste toner box.

1Open the front cover.

2Remove the Waste Toner Box and put it on the flat surface.

3Unpack the caps inside the carton box.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.

10-8

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Change the direction of the used Waste Toner Box as show

below.

5Attach the Cap A.

6Change the direction of the used Waste Toner Box as show

below.

7Attach the Cap B.

10-9

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

8Put the used Waste Toner Box into the plastic waste bag.

9Unpack the new Waste Toner Box.

10 Install the new Waste Toner Box.

11 Close the front cover.

NOTE

Return the exhausted waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be

recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.

10-10

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Loading Paper

When Cassette # runs out of paper, the following messages will be displayed.

"Add the following paper in cassette #."

"Add the following paper in the multi purpose tray."

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-5)

10-11

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

Replacing Staples

When the touch panel shows "Staple is empty.", the staple cartridge holder need to be replenished with staples.

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

3Replace the staples.

NOTE

If the Staple Unit runs out of staples, contact your dealer or service representative.

10-12

Troubleshooting > Regular Maintenance

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Return the unit to the original position.

10-13

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Solving Malfunctions

The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving.

If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following

pages. If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.

Machine Operation Trouble

When the following machine operation troubles occur, implement appropriate procedures.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.

To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-16)

Machine Operation Trouble (page 10-13)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

An application does not

start.

Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30

seconds or more.

page 8-40

The screen does not

respond when the power

switch is turned on.

Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord

securely.

page 2-8

Pressing the [Start] key

does not produce copies.

Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response to

the message and respond accordingly.

page 10-20

Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation panel to

recover the machine from Sleep mode.

page 2-26

Blank sheets are ejected. Are the originals loaded correctly? When placing originals on the platen,

place them face-down and align them

with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, place them face-up.

page 5-3

―Check that the settings of the

application software.

―

Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-4

Is the paper of the supported type? Is it

in good condition?

Remove the paper, turn it over, and

reload it.

page 3-4

Is the paper curled, folded or wrinkled? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Are there any loose scraps or jammed

paper in the machine?

Remove any jammed paper. page 10-41

10-14

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2 or more sheets are

overlaps when ejected.

(multi feed)

―Load the paper correctly. page 3-2

Printouts are wrinkled. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. page 3-4

―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Printouts are curled. ―Turn the orientation 180 degrees around

in which the paper is positioned.

page 3-2

Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-4

Cannot print. Is the machine plugged in? Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. ―

Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. page 2-9

Are the USB cable and network cable

connected?

Connect the correct USB cable and

network cable securely.

page 2-7

Is the print job paused? Resume printing. page 7-10

Cannot print with USB

memory.

USB memory not

recognized.

Is the USB host blocked? Select [Unblock] in the USB host

settings.

page 8-37

―Check that the USB memory is securely

plugged into the machine.

―

While "Auto-IP" is set to

[On], the IP address is not

assigned automatically.

Is a value other than "0.0.0.0" entered

for the IP address of TCP/IP(v4)?

Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of

TCP/IP(v4).

page 2-24

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-15

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Cannot send via SMB. Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable

securely.

page 2-7

Have the network settings for the

equipment been configured properly?

Configure the TCP/IP settings properly. page 8-29

Have the folder sharing settings been

configured properly?

Check sharing settings and access

privileges under the folder properties.

page 3-14

Has the SMB protocol been set to [On]? Set the SMB protocol setting to [On]. page 8-31

Has [Host Name] been entered

properly? *1

Check the name of the computer to

which data is being sent.

page 5-22

Has [Path] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared

folder.

page 5-22

Has [Login User Name] been entered

properly? *1 *2

Check the domain name and login user

name.

page 5-22

Has the same domain name been used for

[

Host Name

] and [

Delete the domain name and backslash

("/") from [

page 5-22

Has [Login Password] been entered

properly?

Check the login password. page 5-22

Have exceptions for Windows Firewall

been configured properly?

Configure exceptions for Windows

Firewall properly.

page 3-18

Do the time settings for the equipment,

domain server, and data destination

computer differ?

Set the equipment, domain server, and

data destination computer to the same

time.

―

Is the screen displaying Send error? Refer to Responding to Send Error.page 10-30

Cannot send via the e-mail. Is the E-mail send size limit set in the

SMTP server registered on the

machine?

Check the limit value is entered to "E-

mail Size Limit" of [E-mail] setting in

Command Center RX and change the

value as necessary.

page 2-52

The machine is emitting

steam in the area around the

paper ejection slot.

Check the room temperature to see if it

is low, or if damp paper was used.

Depending on the printing environment

and the paper's condition, the heat

generated during printing will cause the

moisture in the paper to evaporate, and

the steam emitted may look like smoke.

This is not a problem, and you can

continue printing. If the steam concerns

you, raise the room temperature, or

replace the paper with a newer, dryer

paper.

―

*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (for example, pc001.abcdnet.com).

*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:

Domain_name/user_name (for example, abcdnet/james.smith)

User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-16

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printed Image Trouble

When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Printouts are totally too light. Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. page 3-2

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-16

page 8-42

Is the toner distributed evenly within the

toner container?

Shake the toner container from side to

side several times.

page 10-4

Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Disable [EcoPrint] mode. page 8-16

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [DEV-CLN]

Run [DEV-CLN].

―

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-40

―Make sure the paper type setting is

correct for the paper being used.

page 8-15

Printouts are too dark even

though the background of

the scanned original is white.

Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. page 6-16

page 8-42

―Run [Calibration]. page 10-40

Copies have a moire pattern

(dots grouped together in

patterns and not aligned

uniformly).

Is the original a printed photograph? Set the original image to [Photo]. page 6-16

Texts are not clearly printed. Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-16

10-17

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Black or color dots appear on

the white background when

white original is scanned.

Is the original holder or the glass platen

dirty?

Clean the original holder or the glass

platen.

page 10-2

Printouts are fuzzy. Is the machine being used in conditions

of very humid, or humidity or

temperature rapidly changes?

Use in an environment that has suitable

humidity.

―

―Run [Drum Refresh]page 10-39

Images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly?

When placing originals on the platen, align

them with the original size indicator plates.

page 5-2

When placing originals in the document

processor, align the original width guides

securely before placing the originals.

page 5-3

Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width

guides.

page 3-4

Irregular horizontal lines

appear in the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase

the adjustment value. Increase the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is still no improvement,

return the setting to the original value.

―

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and irregular

horizontal white lines appear

in the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [Altitude

Adjustment], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

The altitude is 1000 m or

higher and dots appear in

the image.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [Altitude

Adjustment], and set to an elevation

one level higher than the current setting.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-18

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Printouts have vertical lines.

Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. page 10-3

―Run [Laser Scanner Cleaning]. page 10-40

Dirt on the top edge or back

of the paper.

Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine

interior is dirty with toner, clean it using

soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

―

Part of the image is

periodically faint or shows

white lines.

―Open and then close the right cover. ―

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [MC] and decrease

the adjustment value. Decrease the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

decreased by 1 level, decrease by 1

level again. If there is still no

improvement, return the setting to the

original value.

―

―Run [Drum Refresh]. page 10-39

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [DEV-CLN]

Run [DEV-CLN].

―

Print on the back of the

sheet is visible on the front.

―Set [Prevent Bleed-through] to [On]. page 6-23

page 8-16

The previous image remains

and lightly printed.

―Select the [System Menu/Counter] key

> [Adjustment/Maintenance] >

[Service Setting] > [MC] and increase

the adjustment value. Increase the

adjustment value 1 level at a time from

the current value. If there is no

improvement after the value is

increased by 1 level, increase by 1 level

again. If there is still no improvement,

return the setting to the original value.

―

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-19

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Color printing trouble

When the following color printing trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures.

Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Skewed-color printout. ―Run [Calibration]. page 10-40

―Run [Color Registration]. page 10-33

Colors appear different than

you anticipated.

Did you choose appropriate image

quality for the original?

Select appropriate image quality. page 6-16

Have you loaded color copy paper into

the paper tray?

Load color copy paper into the paper

tray.

―

―Run [Calibration]. page 10-40

―Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]page 10-38

―When making copies

Adjust the color balance.

page 6-19

―When printing from a computer

Adjust the color using the printer driver.

―

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment in the System

Menu. is displayed.

Over long periods of use, the effects of

the ambient temperature and humidity

can cause color output hues to vary

slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]page 10-38

The color toner is empty. Do you want to continue printing in black

and white?

If the black toner is remained, the

machine continues printing in black and

white by selecting [Print in Black and

White] of [Color Toner Empty Action].

page 8-19

10-20

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Messages

If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.

NOTE

When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:

Display for Device Information (page 2-16)

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (page 5-5)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Acceptable staple count

exceeded.

Is the acceptable staple count

exceeded?

Select [Continue] to print without

stapling. Select [Cancel] to cancel

the job.

—

Activation error. ―Turn the power switch off and on. If

the error exists, contact

administrator.

page 2-9

Add the following paper

in cassette #.

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper Selection] to select

the other paper source. Select

[Continue] to print on the paper in

the currently selected paper source.

page 3-2

Add the following paper

in the multi purpose tray.

Does the selected paper size

matches the paper size loaded in

the specified paper source?

Select [Continue] to continue

printing.

Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.

—

Is the indicated cassette out of

paper?

Load paper.

Select [Paper Selection] to select

the other paper source. Select

[Continue] to print on the paper in

the currently selected paper source.

page 3-9

Adjusting… ―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Box is not found. ―The specified box cannot be found.

Job is canceled. Select [End].

—

Box limit exceeded.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

Is [End] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no

further storage is available; Job is

canceled. Select [End]. Try to

perform the job again after printing

or deleting data from the box.

—

10-21

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Calibrating… — The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

page 10-40

Cannot connect to

Authentication Server.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

— Set machine time to match the

server's time.

page 2-23

— Check the domain name. page 9-2

— Check the host name. page 9-2

— Check the connection status with

the server.

—

Cannot duplex print on

the following paper.*1

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be duplex printed?

Select [Paper Selection] to select

the available paper. Select

[Continue] to print without using

Duplex function.

page 6-27

Cannot print the

specified number of

copies.*1

— Only one copy is available. Select

[Continue] to continue printing.

Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following settings:

• Uncheck [RAM Disk] in the

[Device Settings] tab of the

printer's properties.

NOTE

If you unchecked the [RAM Disk],

check the [RAM Disk] again after

the printing is completed. If not,

print speed may be reduced.

—

Cannot process this

job.*1

―This job is canceled because it is

restricted by User Authorization or

Job Accounting. Select [End].

―

Cannot staple the

following paper.

Did you select a paper size/type

that cannot be stapled?

Select [Paper Selection] to select

the available paper. Select

[Continue] to print without using

Staple function.

―

Cannot use Staple due

to a failure.

―Contact your Service

Representative.

―

Cassette # failure. ―Contact your Service

Representative.

―

Cleaning the laser

scanner…

— The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

―

10-22

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Error occurred at

cassette #.

―Remove the indicated cassette.

Select [Next >] to follow the

instructions.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Failed to specify Job

Accounting.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

— Failed to specify Job Accounting

when processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select [End].

—

Failed to store job

retention data.

— The job is canceled. Select [End].

Insufficient free space in the Job

Box. Try to perform the job again

after printing or deleting data from

the Job Box.

—

Finisher tray is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage capacity

exceeded for the document finisher

tray?

Remove paper from the document

finisher tray.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

High temperature.

Adjust room temp.

— Adjust the temperature and the

humidity of your room.

—

10-23

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Incorrect account ID.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

— The account ID was incorrect when

processing the job externally. The

job is canceled. Select [End].

—

Incorrect box password. — The box password was incorrect

when processing the job externally.

The job is canceled. Select [End].

—

Incorrect Login User

Name or Password.*1

— The login user name or password

was incorrect when processing the

job externally. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

—

Inner tray is full of paper. — Remove paper from the inner tray.

Select [Continue] to resume

printing. Select [Cancel] to cancel

the job.

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Job Accounting

restriction exceeded.

Is the acceptable printing count

restricted by Job Accounting

exceeded?

The printing count exceeded the

acceptable count restricted by Job

Accounting. Cannot print any more.

This job is canceled. Select [End].

―

Job separator tray is full

of paper.

Is the maximum capacity of the job

separator tray exceeded?

Follow the instruction indicated on

the machine and remove paper

from the job separator tray.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

KPDL error.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

―PostScript error has occurred. The

job is canceled. Select [End].

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Low temperature. Adjust

room temp.

— Adjust the temperature and the

humidity of your room.

—

10-24

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Machine failure. ―Internal error has occurred. Make a

note of the error code displayed on

the screen, and contact your

Service Representative.

―

Mailbox (tray #) failure. ―Contact your Service

Representative.

—

Mailbox tray # is full of

paper.

Is the acceptable storage capacity

exceeded for the Mailbox tray?

Remove paper from the Mailbox

tray.

—

Maximum number of

scanned pages.

Is the acceptable scanning count

exceeded?

Only one copy of the scanned pages

is available. Select [

Continue

] to

print, send or store the scanned

pages. Select [

Cancel

] to cancel

printing, sending or storing.

—

Memory card error. ―An error has occurred on the

memory card. Job is canceled.

Select [End].

04: Insufficient space on the

memory card to complete this

operation. Move data or delete

unneeded data.

—

Memory is full.*1

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

Do you want to send the scanned

image to the PC, or store the image

in the machine?

The process cannot be performed

due to insufficient memory. The job

is canceled. Select [End].

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following setting:

• Decrease [Image Quality] of

[File Format].

—

Do you want to print data from the

PC?

Unable to continue the job as the

memory is used up. Select

[Continue] to print the scanned

pages. The print job cannot be

processed completely. Select

[Cancel] to cancel the job.

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following settings:

•Select [On] of RAM Disk Setting

in System Menu, and then

decrease the RAM disk size.

• Select [

Printer Priority

] of

Optional Memory in System Menu.

NOTE

Before changing the RAM Disk

Setting or Optional Memory setting,

contact your administrator.

—

10-25

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Paper jam. ―If a paper jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and follow

the instruction to remove the

jammed paper.

page 10-41

Perform Tone Curve

Adjustment.

Over long periods of use, the effects

of the ambient temperature and

humidity can cause color output

hues to vary slightly.

Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. page 10-38

Preparing to print. ―The machine is under the

adjustment to maintain its quality.

Please wait.

—

Print overrun. — Warning. Low printer memory. The

job was paused. Re-starting the job.

Select [Continue].

—

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

RAM disk error. ―An error has occurred on the RAM

disk. Job is canceled. Select [End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

04: Insufficient space on the RAM

disk. If the optional RAM disk is

installed, increase the RAM disk

size by changing RAM Disk Setting

in System Menu.

NOTE

The range of RAM disk size can be

increased by selecting [Printer

Priority] in Optional Memory.

page 8-38

10-26

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Removable memory

error.

Is writing to a removable memory

prohibited?

An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Select

[End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: Connect a removable memory

that can be written to.

―

―An error occurred in the removable

memory. The job stopped. Select

[End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error

still occurs, the removable memory

is not compatible with the machine.

Use the removable memory

formatted by this machine. If the

removable memory cannot be

formatted, it is damaged. Connect a

compatible removable memory.

―

Removable Memory is

full.*1

―Job is canceled. Select [End].

Insufficient free space in the

removable memory. Delete

unnecessary files.

―

Remove originals in

document processor.

Are there any originals left in the

document processor?

Remove originals from the

document processor.

―

Replace all originals and

press [Continue].

— Remove originals from the

document processor, put them back

in their original order, and place

them again. Select [Continue] to

resume printing. Select [Cancel] to

cancel the job.

—

Replace MK. — Replacement of the parts in the

maintenance kit is necessary at

every 200,000 pages of printing and

requires professional servicing.

Contact your Service

Representative.

—

Running security

function...

— Running security function. Please

wait.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-27

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Scanner memory is

full.*1

— Scanning cannot be performed due

to insufficient memory of scanner.

Only one copy of the scanned

pages is available. Select

[Continue] to print, send or store

the scanned pages. Select [Cancel]

to cancel the printing job.

The machine may reproduce the

same originals by arranging the

following settings:

• Reduce the number of originals

to be scanned at once.

Furthermore, the machine may

reproduce the same originals by

arranging the following settings:

•Select [Copy Priority] of

Optional Memory in System

Menu.

NOTE

Before changing the Optional

Memory setting, contact your

administrator.

—

Send Error.*1 — An error has occurred during

transmission. The job is canceled.

Select [End].

Refer to Responding to Send Error

for the error code and corrective

actions.

page 10-30

SSD error. — An error has occurred on SSD. Job

is canceled. Select [End].

The possible error codes and their

descriptions are as follows.

01: The amount of data that can be

saved at once has been exceeded.

Turn the power OFF/ON. If the error

still occurs, divide the file into

smaller files. If the error occurs after

the file is divided, the specified file

may be damaged. Delete the file.

04: Insufficient space on SSD to

complete this operation. Move data

or delete unneeded data.

—

Staple is empty. Has any of the document finisher

run out of staples?

If the staples are depleted, the

machine will stop and the location of

staple depletion will be indicated on

the screen. Leave the machine on

and follow the instruction to replace

the staple case.

Select [Continue] to print without

stapling. Select [Cancel] to cancel

the job.

—

10-28

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Staple jam. — If a staple jam occurs, the machine

will stop and the location of the jam

will be indicated on the screen.

Leave the machine on and follow

the instruction to remove the

jammed staple.

—

System error. — System error has occurred. Follow

the instructions on the screen.

—

*1 When Auto Error Clear is set to [On], processing resumes automatically after a set amount of time elapses. For details

on Auto Error Clear, refer to the following:

Auto Error Clear (page 8-41)

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

The cover is open. Is the top cover of the document

processor open?

Close the document processor

cover.

―

Is there any cover which is open? Close the cover indicated on the

screen.

The slit glass requires

cleaning.

— Clean the slit glass using the

cleaning cloth supplied with the

document processor.

page 10-3

This memory is not

formatted.

Is the removable memory formatted

by this machine?

Perform [Format] on this machine. page 7-11

This user account is

locked out.

— Contact administrator.

Job is canceled. Select [End].

—

Toner [C][M][Y][K] are

empty.

— Replace the toner container to our

specified toner container.

NOTE

If the color toner is empty but the

black toner is remained, the

machine continues printing in black

and white by selecting [Print in

Black and White] of Color Toner

Empty Action.

page 10-4

Toner is low. [C][M][Y][K]

(Replace when empty.)

— It is almost time to replace the toner

container. Obtain a new toner

container.

―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Unknown toner installed. Is the installed toner container our

own brand?

We will not be liable for any damage

caused by the use of third party

supplies in this machine.

―

Unknown Toner

Installed. PC [C][M][Y][K]

Does the installed toner container's

regional specification match the

machine's?

Install the specified container. ―

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-29

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

Waste toner box is full. Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. page 10-7

Waste toner box is not

installed.

— The waste toner box is not installed

correctly. Set it correctly.

page 10-7

Warning low memory. — Cannot start the job. Try again later. —

Message Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference

Page

You cannot use this box. — You cannot use the specified box.

Job is canceled. Select [End].

—

10-30

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

Responding to Send Error

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the

Command Center RX.

page 2-52

Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. page 5-25

Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. page 5-22

1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Host name

•Path

page 5-22

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center RX.

• SMTP login user name and login password

• POP3 login user name and login password

• E-mail size limit

page 2-52

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-25

1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.

• Login user name and login password

NOTE

If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain

name.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-22

Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.

•Path

• Folder share permissions of the recipient

page 5-25

1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.

NOTE

If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot

send the email.

page 5-21

10-31

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [Protocol Detail] >

[SMB Client (Transmission)]

page 8-29

Failed to send the e-mail. Select [On] of the SMTP settings on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-52

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [Protocol Detail] >

[FTP Client (Transmission)]

page 8-29

1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command

Center RX.

page 2-52

1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] >

[Network] > [Secure Protocol] > [SSL]

page 8-33

1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.

• Is SMTP over SSL available?

• Is the encryption available?

Refer to the

Command

Center RX

User Guide.

Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTPS available?

• Is the encryption available?

—

2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• Host name and IP address

• Port number

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

• POP3 server name of the POP3 user

• SMTP server name

page 2-52

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-32

Troubleshooting > Troubleshooting

2102

2103

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Check the following of the FTP server.

• Is FTP available?

• The server is not operating properly.

—

Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2201

2202

2203

2231

Failed to send the e-mail.

Failed to send via FTP.

Failed to send via SMB.

Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on

the Command Center RX.

page 2-52

3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender

and the recipient.

—

Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.

• The network cable is connected.

• The hub is not operating properly.

• The server is not operating properly.

—

3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the

recipient.

—

0007

4201

4701

5101

5102

5103

5104

7101

7102

7103

720f

— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this error

occurs several times, make a note of the displayed

error code and contact your service representative.

page 2-9

9181 — The scanned original exceeds the acceptable number

of pages of 999. Send the excess pages separately.

—

Error

Code Message Corrective Actions Reference

Page

10-33

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Adjustment/Maintenance

Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance

If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/

Maintenance in the system menu.

The table below lists the item you can carry out.

Color Registration Procedure

When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during printing may occur. Use this function to

correct the color position of each of cyan, magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.

Auto registration and manual registration are available for Color Registration. Color drift can be largely corrected through

auto registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual registration.

Auto Correction

1Load paper.

Item Description Reference Page

Color Registration Procedure Correct the color position to resolve color drift. page 10-33

Tone Curve Adjustment The printed output tone may differ from the original. Perform this function

to ensure consistency with the original tone.

page 10-38

Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. page 10-39

Calibration Adjust color drift or hue of printed image in the most appropriate color. page 10-40

Laser Scanner Cleaning Adjust the printed image that is too light or incomplete, even though there

is enough toner.

page 10-40

NOTE

To perform color registration, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

IMPORTANT

Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration. If color drift remains, perform color

registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will be resolved

once, however, it may cause the serious color drift later.

10-34

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] > [Auto]

3Print the chart.

Select [Start].

A chart is printed.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

10-35

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Chart Example

4Perform the color registration.

1As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with

the arrows toward the back.

2Select [Start] to scan the chart.

When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.

3When color printing position correction ends, Select [OK].

10-36

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Manual Correction

1Load paper.

2Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] >

[Manual]

3Print the chart.

Select [Print Chart].

A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-

1 to 5 and V-1 to 5 are printed.

IMPORTANT

• Load the paper with the print side facing up.

• After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in

the cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is

curled or folded may cause paper jams.

• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see illustration

above).

• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width

guide, the paper may skew or become jammed.

10-37

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Chart Example

4Enter the appropriate value.

1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position,

registration for that color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.

From charts H-1 to H-5, read the values from H-1 to H-5.

From charts V-1 to V-5, read only the values from V-3 (center).

10-38

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

2[Detail] > [Registration]

3Select the chart to be corrected.

4Select [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart.

Select [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, select [-].

By selecting [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the

reverse direction, select [+].

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.

5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart.

6Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.

7Select [OK] after color registration is complete.

Tone Curve Adjustment

After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the printed output tone may differ from

the original. Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone. Before executing Tone Curve Adjustment,

execute calibration. If calibration does not improve the tones, perform Tone Curve Adjustment.

Calibration (page 10-40)

A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment. The printed patterns are read sequentially during

the adjustment.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Tone Curve Adjustment]

NOTE

To perform tone curve adjustment, verify that either Letter or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

10-39

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

2Adjust the tone curve.

1Select [Start]. A pattern is printed.

Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.

2As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with

the arrows toward the back.

3Select [Start]. The pattern is read and adjustment begins.

The second pattern is output.

4Check that the number "2" is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3

twice to read patterns 2 and 3 in sequence.

5Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.

Drum Refresh

Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]

2Perform the drum refresh.

Select [Start]. "Drum Refresh" begins.

NOTE

Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

10-40

Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance

Calibration

Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Calibration]

2Perform the calibration.

Select [Start]. "Calibration" begins.

Laser Scanner Cleaning

Remove vertical lines from the printout.

1Display the screen.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Laser Scanner Cleaning]

2Perform the laser scanner cleaning.

Select [Start]. "Laser Scanner Cleaning" begins.

NOTE

When the hue and color drift are not enhanced even after performing calibration, refer to the following:

Color Registration Procedure (page 10-33)

10-41

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the touch panel will display "Paper Jam." and the machine will stop. Refer to these procedures to

remove the jammed paper.

Jam Location Indicators

If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.

1 Shows the location of a paper jam.

2 Shows the previous step.

3 Shows the next step.

4 Shows the removal procedure.

5 Selecting [Status/Job Cancel] key

displays [Hold]. Selecting [Hold]

displays status screen, and the status

of jobs can be checked.

6Select [Display Error] to return to the

paper jam guidance.

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

ACassette 1 page 10-43

BCassette 2 page 10-43

CCassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) page 10-44

Cassette 3 (2000-sheet x 1) page 10-46

DCassette 4 (500-sheet x 2) page 10-48

EMulti Purpose Tray page 10-50

FRight Cover 1 page 10-51

10:10

JAM 0001

Paper jam.

< Back Next >

1/3

Clear the paper jammed in

Cassette 1.

Press [Next >] to follow

the instructions.

Status/Job Cancel.

Status

Print Job Status

10:10

Send Job Status

Store Job Status

Scheduled Job

Pause All

Print Jobs

1/5

CloseDisplay

Error

10:10

JAM 0001

Paper jam.

< Back Next >

1/3

Clear the paper jammed in

Cassette 1.

Press [Next >] to follow

the instructions.

10-42

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes

with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.

GRight Cover 2 page 10-54

HRight Cover 3 page 10-55

page 10-56

IBridge Unit page 10-57

JMailbox page 10-58

KInner Finisher page 10-59

LDocument Processor page 10-60

Paper Jam Location Indicator

Paper Jam Location Reference Page

10-43

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1 and 2

Procedures for handling a paper jam in Cassettes 1 and 2 are all the same. Here, we'll explain the procedures for

cassette 1, as an example.

1Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.

2Remove any jammed paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-44

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Push Cassette 1 back in.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

10-45

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-46

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

5Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 3 (2000-sheet x 1)

See the explanation for Cassette 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

10-47

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

3Pull Cassette 3 out toward you until it stops.

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Push Right Cover 2 and Cassette 3 back in.

10-48

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 4 (500-sheet x 2)

See the explanation for Cassette 4 below.

1Open Right Cover 3.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Pull Cassette 4 out toward you until it stops.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-49

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Push Right Cover 3 and Cassette 4 back in.

NOTE

To remove paper which is difficult to get access to, the cassette can be removed.

10-50

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

See the explanation for the Multi Purpose Tray below.

1Remove any jammed paper.

2Remove all the paper.

3Reload the paper.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-51

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1

See the explanation for Right Cover 1 below.

1Open Right Cover 1.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Open the cover (A1).

CAUTION

The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of getting

burned.

10-52

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove any jammed paper.

5Open the cover (A2).

6Remove any jammed paper.

7Open the duplex unit (A3).

10-53

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

8Remove any jammed paper.

9Push Right Cover 1.

10-54

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2

See the explanation for Right Cover 2 below.

1Open Right Cover 2.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Right Cover 2.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-55

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (500-

sheet x 2)

See the explanation for Right Cover 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 3.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Right Cover 3.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-56

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 3 (2000-

sheet x 1)

See the explanation for Right Cover 3 below.

1Open Right Cover 3.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Push Right Cover 3.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-57

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit

See the explanation for the Bridge Unit below.

1Open the cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-58

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Mailbox

See the explanation for the Mailbox below.

1Open the cover.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Close the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-59

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Inner Finisher

See the explanation for the Inner Finisher below.

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Remove any jammed paper.

3Return the unit to the original position.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-60

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

Remove any jammed paper in the Document

Processor

See the explanation for the Document Processor below.

1Remove the originals from the Original Table.

2Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper.

3Open Reverse Unit (F) and remove any jammed paper from the

Original Eject Table.

CAUTION

• Do not reuse jammed papers.

• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the machine.

Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.

10-61

Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams

4Remove the originals from the reverse unit.

5Remove originals inside the document processor.

6Push the cover.

10-62

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a Staple Jam

Clearing a staple jam

1Open the inner finisher unit.

2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.

3Remove the jammed staple.

10-63

Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam

4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.

5Return the unit to the original position.

11-1

11 Appendix

This chapter explains the following topics:

Optional Equipment .......................................................................................................................................... 11-2

Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................................................ 11-2

Optional Applications .............................................................................................................................. 11-6

Character Entry Method .................................................................................................................................... 11-8

Entry Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 11-8

Entering Characters .............................................................................................................................. 11-10

Paper .............................................................................................................................................................. 11-11

Basic Paper Specifications ................................................................................................................... 11-11

Choosing the Appropriate Paper .......................................................................................................... 11-12

Special Paper ........................................................................................................................................ 11-15

Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 11-19

Machine ................................................................................................................................................ 11-19

Copy Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 11-21

Printer Functions ................................................................................................................................... 11-21

Scanner Functions ................................................................................................................................ 11-22

Document Processor ............................................................................................................................ 11-22

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) .................................................................................................................... 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) ............................................................................................................... 11-23

Paper Feeder (2,000-sheet) ................................................................................................................. 11-23

Innner Finisher ...................................................................................................................................... 11-24

Mailbox ................................................................................................................................................. 11-24

Job separator ........................................................................................................................................ 11-25

Glossary .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-26

11-2

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment

Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.

* If PF-5130 or PF-5140 is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed.

(6) PF-5120

(5) PF-5140*(4) PF-5130*

(3) MT-5100

(1) JS-5100(2) DF-5100

11-3

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(7) FAX System 11

(8) IB-50 (9) IB-51 (10) HD-6/HD-7

(12) DT-5100

(11) Card Authentication kit(B)

Software option

(13) UG-33

(14) Data Security kit(E)

(15) USB Keyboard

(16) Expansion Memory

(17) SD/SDHC Memory Card

11-4

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(1) JS-5100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as

the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the

received fax data.

(2) DF-5100 "Inner Finisher"

This is a large-capacity document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple

copies of a printout into individual copies. It can also staple the offset printouts.

(3) MT-5100 "Mailbox"

Makes it easy to sort output into separate trays. Installing this option adds 6 output trays. When multiple computer users

share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray.

(4) PF-5130 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the printer's cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

(5) PF-5140 "Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet)"

In addition to the printer's cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (2,000-sheet) capable of

holding up to 2,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.

Loading in the Large Capacity Feeder (page 3-8)

(6) PF-5120 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet)"

One additional cassettes identical to the printer's cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading

method are the same as the standard cassettes.

Loading in the Cassettes (page 3-4)

(7) FAX System 11 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a

computer.

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

NOTE

To ensure that paper is delivered to the Job Separator, select the output destination or change the default setting.

Paper Output (page 6-15)

The busy light stays on until the output is removed from the Job Separator.

NOTE

To deliver output to the mail box, change the Paper Output selection on the operation panel or in the printer driver, or

change in the default settings.

Paper Output (page 6-15)

11-5

Appendix > Optional Equipment

(8) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. Settings are possible

for a variety of OS and network protocols.

IB-50 User's Manual

(9) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and

11 g/b.

With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.

IB-51 User's Manual

(10) HD-6/HD-7 "SSD"

With SSD installed in the machine, received data can be rasterized and stored on this SSD. This enables high-speed

printing of multiple copies using an electric sort function. Also, you can use the Document Box functions.

Printing Documents in Custom Box (page 5-46)

(11) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on

the previously registered local user list. For more information about how to register this information, refer to the

following:

Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide

(12) DT-5100 "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.

(13) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.

(14) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area so that it cannot be retrieved. The Data

Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the SSD. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded

by ordinary output or operations.

(15) USB Keyboard "USB Keyboard"

A USB keyboard can be used to enter information into the text fields on the operation panel. A special mount is also

available to install the keyboard on the machine. Please contact your dealer or service representative for information on

keyboards that are compatible with your machine before you purchase one.

(16) "Expansion Memory"

The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the

machine's memory up to 2,048 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.

(17) "SD/SDHC Memory Card"

An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an

SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.

11-6

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Optional Applications

Overview of the Applications

The applications listed below are installed on this machine.

Starting Application Use

Use the procedure below to start using an application.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]

2Select the desired application and select [Activate].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].

3Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not

appear, go to Step 4.

To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.

4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Application

Data Security Kit

Card Authentication Kit*1

*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.

ThinPrint Option*1

NOTE

• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the

application.

• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the

application.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

NOTE

• If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the

power OFF/ON.

• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.

11-7

Appendix > Optional Equipment

Checking Details of Application

Use the procedure below to check the details of application.

1[System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]

2Select the desired application and select [ ].

You can view detailed information on the selected application.

The table below lists the item you can view.

Extend the trial period.

[Extend] > [Yes]

The trial period is extended.

NOTE

If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login

password and select [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges.

The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Item

Function Name

License

Remaining Counts

Expiration Date

Status

11-8

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Character Entry Method

To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.

Entry Screens

Lower-case Letter Entry Screen

NOTE

Keyboard Layout

"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select the

[System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.

"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.

No. Display/Key Description

1Display Displays entered characters.

2Keyboard Select the character to enter.

3[Cancel] Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before

the entry was made.

4[< Back] Select to return to the previous screen.

5[OK] / [Next >] Select to save the entered characters and move to the next screen.

6Enter Key Select to enter a line break.

7Space Key Select to insert a space.

8Delete Key Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.

9[Input] / [Limit]

Display

Displays maximum number of characters and the number of

characters entered.

10 Cursor Key Select to move the cursor on the display.

11 [A/a] / [A/a]Select to switch between upper case and lower case.

12 [ABC] / [Symbol] Select the characters that are entered. To enter symbols or numbers,

select [Symbol].

Input:

Limit:

< Back Next >Cancel

Add - Name

poitrq

uyew

kgfajhds

.vc@xz

Abc

Del.

A/a

mnb

ABC

11 10 8

912

11-9

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Upper-case Letter Entry Screen

Number/Symbol Entry Screen

No. Display/Key Description

13 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, select the

cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to

enter.

Input:

Limit:

< Back Next >Cancel

Del.

ABC A/a

QW E R T Y U I O P

ASDFGHJKL

_~ZX CV BNM

Add - Name

Input:

Limit:

Symbol Del.

< Back Next >Cancel

Add - Name

123



11-10

Appendix > Character Entry Method

Entering Characters

Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.

1Enter 'List', (space).

To shift from lower case to upper case letters, select [A/a]. To shift from upper case to lower

case letters, select [A/a].

2Enter 'A-1'.

To enter numbers or symbols, select [ABC] to display [Symbol].

3Register the characters you entered.

Select [Next>]. The entered characters are registered.

Input:

Limit:

< Back Next >Cancel

Del.

ABC A/a

QW E R T Y U I O P

ASDFGHJKL

_~ZX CV BNM

Add - Name

Input:

Limit:

< Back Next >Cancel

Add - Name

poitrq

uyew

kgfajhds

.vc@xz

List

Del.

A/a

mnb

ABC

1, 3

Input:

Limit:

< Back Next >Cancel

List A

Del.

ABC A/a

QW E R T Y U I O P

ASDFGHJKL

_~ZX CV BNM

Add - Name

Input:

Limit:

Symbol Del.

< Back Next >Cancel

Add - Name

List A-1



Input:

Limit:

Symbol Del.

< Back Next >Cancel

Add - Name

List A-1



11-11

Appendix > Paper

Paper

This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.

For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the

following:

Specifications (page 11-19)

Basic Paper Specifications

This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as

laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.

Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.

Supported Paper

Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.

Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.

Basic Paper Specifications

The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections

for further details.

We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.

Criteria Specifications

Weight Cassettes: 60 to 220 g/m2

Multi purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

Moisture content 4 to 6%

Pulp content 80% or more

NOTE

Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper Specifications

shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a small amount of

recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best printing results and

contains low levels of paper dust.

11-12

Appendix > Paper

Choosing the Appropriate Paper

This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.

Condition

Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper

fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may

also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,

avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.

Ingredients

Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those

types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.

Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content

consists of cotton or other fibers.

Supported Paper Sizes

Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.

Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must

be 90° ± 0.2°.

Multi Purpose Tray

• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm)

• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm)

• Custom (70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Cassettes or Multi Purpose Tray

• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2")

• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2")

• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm)

• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm)

• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2")

•Letter

• Legal

• A4 (297 × 210 mm)

• B5 (257 × 182 mm)

• A5 (210 × 148 mm)

• A6 (148 × 105 mm)

• B6 (182 × 128 mm)

• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8")

• Envelope #6 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2")

• ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm)

• Oficio II

• 216 × 340 mm

• 16K (273 × 197 mm)

11-13

Appendix > Paper

• Statement

• Folio (210 × 330 mm)

• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm)

• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm)

• Custom (Cassette: 92 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm, Multi Purpose Tray: 70 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Smoothness

The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several

sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.

Basis Weight

In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in

area. In the United States, basis weight is the weight in pounds of one ream (500 sheets) of paper cut to the standard

size (or trade size) for a specific grade of paper. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause

paper jams, which may cause excessive wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several

sheets to be supplied at once accidentally and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to

adhere correctly.

Moisture Content

Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is

supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.

Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to

become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,

making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.

Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.

To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.

• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.

• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for

a while.

• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.

Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.

• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.

• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.

11-14

Appendix > Paper

Other Paper Specifications

Porosity: The density of the paper fibers.

Stiffness: Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.

Curl: Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls

upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.

Static electricity: During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be

discharged quickly so that copies do not cling together.

Whiteness: Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.

Quality: Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough,

sheets are uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you

cut the paper yourself.

Packaging: Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have

been treated with a coating to inhibit moisture.

Specially treated paper: We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the

basic specifications. When you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.

• Glossy paper

• Watermarked paper

• Paper with an uneven surface

• Perforated paper

11-15

Appendix > Paper

Special Paper

This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.

The following paper and media can be used.

• Transparencies

• Preprinted paper

• Bond paper

• Recycled paper

• Thin paper

• Letterhead

• Colored paper

• Prepunched paper

• Envelopes

• Hagaki (Cardstock)

• Thick paper

• Labels

•Coated

• High-quality paper

When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as

laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.

Choosing Special Paper

Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary

considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than

regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the

print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not

responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.

Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.

Transparencies

Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.

To avoid problems, use the multi purpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the

machine.

If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.

Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C

Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm

Material Polyester

Dimensional accuracy ±0.7 mm

Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°

11-16

Appendix > Paper

Label

Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.

For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine

and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled

labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.

When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.

Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected

by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of

labels may cause more problems.

The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,

resulting in a serious failure.

Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the

carrier sheet before completing output.

Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.

Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²

Basis weight

(overall paper weight)

104 to 151 g/m²

Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm

Overall paper thickness 0.115 to 0.145 mm

Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)

Top sheet

Adhesive layer

Carrier sheet

Not allowedAllowed

Top sheet

Carrier sheet

11-17

Appendix > Paper

Hagaki (Cardstock)

Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock) into the multi purpose tray, fan them and align the edges. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)

paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.

Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough

edges developed by a paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges by placing the Hagaki (Cardstock)

on a flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler.

Envelopes

Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the

print-side up.

Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin

envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing

envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.

Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are

ready to use them.

Keep the following points in mind.

• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is

exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes

off in the machine.

• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a

string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.

• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.

Thick Paper

Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a

paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a

flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.

NOTE

Do not load paper above the load limits located on the paper width guide of the cassette and the optional paper

feeder.

NOTE

If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few

millimeters.

Burrs

11-18

Appendix > Paper

Colored Paper

Colored paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-11)

In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).

Preprinted Paper

Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-11)

The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use

paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.

Recycled Paper

Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.

Basic Paper Specifications (page 11-11)

Coated Paper

Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than

plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.

The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making

the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated

side appears slightly glossy.

NOTE

Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.

IMPORTANT

When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as moisture

may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very humid

environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.

11-19

Appendix > Specifications

Specifications

Machine

IMPORTANT

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

NOTE

For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:

FAX System 11 Operation Guide

Item Description

Type Desktop

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 220 g/m2

Multi Purpose

Tray

60 to 220 g/m2, 230 g/m2 (Cardstock)

Paper Type Cassette

Plain, Rough, Recycled, Vellum, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Thick, High Quality, Envelope, Custom 1 to 8

(Duplex: Same as Simplex)

Multi Purpose

Tray

Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,

Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched,

Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8

Paper Size Cassette A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive,Oficio II,

Folio, 216 × 340 mm, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (92 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Multi Purpose

Tray

A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Letter, Legal, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,

Youkei 2, Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)

Printable area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm.

Warm-up Time

23°C/73.4°F,

60 %

Power on 20 seconds or less

Low Power 10 seconds or less

Sleep 17.6 seconds or less

Paper Capacity Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

Multi Purpose

Tray

100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2) , 25 sheets (larger than

A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)

11-20

Appendix > Specifications

*2 When a fax line is installed, only one optional interface can be installed.

Item Description

Output Tray

Capacity

Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography

Memory 1GB

Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

USB Port: 2 (Hi-Speed USB)

Option eKUIO: 2*2

Fax: 1

Operating

Environment

Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Humidity 10 to 80 %

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H)

(Including the Document

Processor)

21.66" × 19.99" × 29"

550 × 507.5 × 736.6 mm

Weight

(without toner container)

Approx. 105.9 lb/Approx. 48 kg

Space Required (W × D)

(Using multi purpose tray)

31.82" × 19.97"

808 × 507 mm

Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 9.5 A

230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 5.0 A

The power consumption of the

product in networked standby (If

all network ports are connected.)

2.5 W

Options Optional Equipment (page 11-2)

11-21

Appendix > Specifications

Copy Functions

Printer Functions

Item Description

Copy Speed Black and White Copying Full Color Copying

A4 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min

Letter 32 sheets/min 32 sheets/min

Legal 26 sheets/min 26 sheets/min

B5 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min

A5 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min

A6 27 sheets/min 27 sheets/min

First Copy Time

(A4, place on

the platen, feed

from Cassette)

Black and

White

6.4 seconds or less

Color 7.8 seconds or less

Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments

Auto mode: Preset Zoom

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: Legal/

Folio)

Original Feed System Fixed

Item Description

Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.

First Print Time

(A4, feed from

Cassette)

Black and

White

7.0 seconds or less

Color 8.0 seconds or less

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi

Operating System

Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,

Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows Server 2008/R2,

Windows Server 2012/R2, Mac OS 10.5 or later

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)

Optional Interface (Option): 1 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF,

XPS, OpenXPS

11-22

Appendix > Specifications

Scanner Functions

Document Processor

Item Description

Resolution 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200×400 dpi, 200 dpi, 200×100 dpi

File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG

compression), XPS, PDF/A, High compressive PDF, Encrypted PDF,

OPEN XPS

Scanning Speed*1

*1 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)

1-sided B/W 40 Images/min

Color 30 Images/min

2-sided B/W 17 Images/min

Color 13 Images/min

(A4 landscape, 300 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB

Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD

*2 Available Operating System: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/

Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/

Windows Server 2012 R2

*3 Available Operating System: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/

Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2

Item Description

Supported Original Types Sheet originals

Paper Size Maximum: Legal/Folio

Minimum: Statement/A6

Paper Weight 1-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m²

Loading Capacity 75 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor

11-23

Appendix > Specifications

Paper Feeder (500-sheet)

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)

Paper Feeder (2,000-sheet)

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 1 cassette/

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

youkei 4, youkei 2, Custom (105 × 148 to 216 × 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

21.66" × 19.97" × 6.19"

550 × 507 × 157 mm

Weight 21.0 lbs or less/ 9.5 kg or less

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 550, 64 g/m2, 2 cassettes/

No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216×340 mm, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4,

Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, youkei 4, youkei 2,

Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

21.66" × 19.97" × 13.51"

550 × 507 × 343 mm

Weight Approx. 39.7 lbs. / Approx. 18 kg

Item Description

Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder

(No. Sheets: 2,200, 64 g/m2/No. Sheets: 2,000, 80 g/m2)

Paper Size A4, Letter

Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

21.66" × 19.97" × 13.51"

550 × 507 × 343 mm

Weight Approx. 44.1 lbs. / Approx. 20 kg

11-24

Appendix > Specifications

Innner Finisher

Mailbox

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Finisher tray

(no stapling)

Tray A

(Non-stapling)

Legal, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Custom (70 x 298 to 210 x 1020 mm):

250 sheets equivalent or 42 mm height

(Thick: 20 sheets (129 to 220 g/m2))

A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, B6, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K,

B5 (ISO), Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard),

Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch,

Envelope DL, Envelope C5, youkei 4, youkei 2,

Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x 297 mm): 300 sheets equivalent or 42 mm

height (Thick: 20 sheets (129 to 220 g/m2))

Stapling Number of

Sheets

Legal, Oficio II, 216 x

340 mm

30 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

20 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)

A4, B5, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (60 to 90 g/m2)

40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m2)

2 cover sheet only (106 g/m2 to 128 g/m2)

Media types Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color,

Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

(Using multi purpose tray)

25.08" × 15.60" × 6.23"

637 × 396 × 158 mm

Weight Approx. 26.5 lbs. or less / Approx. 12 kg or less

Item Description

Number of Trays 6 trays

Paper Size

(80 g/m2)

Tray 1 (to 5)

216 x 340mm, OficioII, Foolscap (8.5 x 13.5"), Legal, Folio: 50 sheets

A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, 16K, Statement: 100 sheets

Tray A

216 x 340 mm, OficioII, Foolscap (8.5 x 13.5"), Legal, Folio,

Custom (70 x 298 to 210 x 1220 mm): 250 sheets

A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Letter, Executive, 16K, Statement, B5 (ISO),

Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return pstcard),

Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x 297 mm): 500 sheets

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

16.3" × 14.18" × 29.93"

414 × 360 × 760 mm

Weight Approx. 17.7 lbs. / Approx. 8 kg

11-25

Appendix > Specifications

Job separator

Item Description

Number of Trays 1 tray

Maximum Sheets 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)

Paper Size A4, A5, B5, A6, Letter, Legal, B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Statement,

Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9,

Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,

youkei 4, youkei 2, Hagaki (Cardstock),

Oufukuhagaki (Return pstcard), Custom (70 x 148 to 210 x 1220 mm)

Paper Type Paper weight: 60 to 220 g/m2

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material

Dimensions

(W) × (D) × (H)

14.18" × 12.56" × 6.07"

360 × 319 × 154 mm

Weight Approx. 0.9 lbs. / Approx. 0.4 kg

NOTE

Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.

11-26

Appendix > Glossary

Glossary

Accessibility

The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or

visually impaired. Touch panel is adjustable in two angles.

Apple Talk

AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another

computer on the same AppleTalk network.

Auto Form Feed Timeout

During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form

feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is

performed if the last page has no data to be printed.

Auto-IP

Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP

requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0

to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.

Auto Paper Selection

A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.

Auto Sleep

A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a

specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.

Bonjour

Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and

services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically

recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives

network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that

Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run

stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets

are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly

for Bonjour.

Custom Box

The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or

multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.

Default Gateway

This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing

computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,

data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.

11-27

Appendix > Glossary

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway

addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client

computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.

DHCP (IPv6)

DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends

the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the

network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an

IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management

workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.

dpi (dots per inch)

A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).

EcoPrint Mode

A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.

Emulation

The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of

PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).

Enhanced WSD

Proprietary web services.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol)

A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,

FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.

Grayscale

A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black

at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:

that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16

bits.

Help

A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like

more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to

view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.

IP Address

An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.

The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be

between 0 and 255.

11-28

Appendix > Glossary

IPP

IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be

sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and

enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication

mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.

Job Box

The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data

later using the printer's operation panel.

KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)

Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.

Multi Purpose (MP) Tray

The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto

envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.

NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)

An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller

networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities

to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as

a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.

Outline font

With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced

in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,

since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in

steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.

PDF/A

This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use

of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a

specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-

2), is currently being prepared.

POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)

A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.

PostScript

A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional

graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that

enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for

the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.

PPM (prints per minute)

This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.

11-29

Appendix > Glossary

Printer Driver

The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is

contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.

RA(Stateless)

The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information

is the Router Advertisement (RA).

ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".

RAM Disk

Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a

RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).

Send as E-mail

A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected

from the list or entered at each time.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as

well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.

Status Page

The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source

settings.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.

A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in

the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,

in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network

address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In

this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network

address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet

address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".

TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)

TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other

over a network.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and

expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also

introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.

11-30

Appendix > Glossary

TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)

A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The

TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted

on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0

A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with

USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.

WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)

A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This

function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of

operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.

Index-1

Index

Accessibility 11-26

Address Book 3-22

Adding 3-22

Contact 3-22

Editing and Deleting 3-26

Group 3-25

Address Book/One Touch 8-25

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-42

AirPrint 4-9

Apache License (Version 2.0) 1-13

Apple Talk 11-26

Application 5-13, 8-24

Auto Color Correction 8-42

Auto Error Clear 8-41

Auto Form Feed Timeout 11-26

Auto Panel Reset 8-40

Auto Paper Selection 11-26

Auto Sleep 2-27, 11-26

Auto-IP 11-26

Settings 8-29

Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-16

Background Density Adjustment 6-22, 8-42

Default 8-16

Bonjour 11-26

Settings 8-30

Cables 2-6

Calibration 8-43, 10-40

Calibration Cycle 8-43

Card Authentication Kit 11-5

Cassette

Loading Paper 3-4

Paper Size and Media Type 8-8

Cassette 1 2-2

Cassette 3 2-5

Cassette 4 2-5

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-8

Character Entry Method 11-8

Checking the Counter 2-43

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-12

Cleaning 10-2

Document Processor 10-2

Glass Platen 10-2

Slit Glass 10-3

Coated Paper 11-18

Collate 6-12

Collate/Offset

Default 8-16

Color

Calibration 10-40

Color Balance 6-19

Saturation 6-22

Color Balance 6-19

Color Registration 8-42

Color Selection 6-18

Default 8-16

Combine 6-25

Command Center RX 2-46

Common Settings 8-10

Color Toner Empty Action 8-19

Default Screen 8-10

Display Status/Log 8-21

Error Handling 8-19

Format SD Card 8-21

Format SSD 8-21

Function Defaults 8-16

Function Key Usage 8-22

Keyboard Layout 8-20

Low Toner Alert Level 8-20

Measurement 8-20

Original Settings 8-11

Paper Output 8-18

Paper Settings 8-13

Preset Limit 8-18

Sound 8-10

USB Keyboard Type 8-20

Connecting

LAN Cable 2-7

Power Cable 2-8

USB cable 2-8

Connection Method 2-6

Continuous Scan 6-28

Default 8-17

Contrast 6-21, 8-42

Conventions Used in This Guide xx

Copy 5-18

Copy Settings 8-22

Auto % Priority 8-22

Auto Paper Selection 8-22

DP Read Action 8-22

Reserve Next Priority 8-22

Copy Speed 11-21

Correcting Black Line 8-42

Counting the Number of Pages Printed

Counter 2-43

Each Job Account 9-43

Print Accounting Report 9-44

Total Accounting 9-43

Unknown ID Job 9-46

Custom Box 11-26

Creating a New Box 5-43

Deleting Documents 5-47

Editing and Deleting Custom Box 5-44

Editing Documents 5-46

Printing Documents 5-46

Storing Documents 5-45

Data Sanitization 8-39

Data Security 8-39

Data Security Kit 11-5

Date Format 8-40

Index-2

Date/Time 8-40

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-40

Auto Error Clear 8-41

Auto Panel Reset 8-40

Date Format 8-40

Date/Time 8-40

Error Clear Timer 8-41

Panel Reset Timer 8-40

Ping Timeout 8-41

Sleep Level 8-41

Sleep Rules 8-41

Sleep Timer 8-41

Time Zone 8-40

Unusable Time 8-41

Default Gateway 11-26

Settings 8-29

Default Screen 8-10

Delete after Printed 6-37

Density 6-16

Density Adjustment 8-42

Destination

Adding a Destination 3-22

Address Book 5-35

Checking and Editing 5-39

Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-39

Dest. Check before Send 8-23

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-23

Multi Sending 5-32

One Touch Key 3-27

Search 5-36

Sort 8-25

Device 7-11

DHCP 11-27

Settings 8-29

DHCP (IPv6) 11-27

Settings 8-30

Display Brightness 8-42

Display Status/Log 8-21

Document Box

Basic Operation 5-42

Custom Box 5-41, 5-43

Job Box 4-10, 5-41

Removable Memory Box 5-41

Document Box Settings 8-24

Custom Box 8-24

Job Box 8-24

Polling Box 8-24

Sub Address Box 8-24

Document Processor 2-2

Loading Originals 5-3

Originals Not Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Originals Supported by the Document

Processor 5-3

Part Names 2-2

dpi 11-27

Drum Refresh 8-43

Duplex 6-27

Duplex (2-sided Original) 6-31

EcoPrint 6-17, 11-27

Default 8-16

Printer 8-26

Edit Destination

Address Book 3-22

Address Book Defaults 8-25

Contact 3-22

Group 3-25

One Touch Key 3-27

E-mail Settings 2-52

E-mail Subject/Body 6-36

Default 8-17

Emulation 11-27

Selection 8-26

Encrypted PDF Password 6-38

Energy Saving Control Function 1-16

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program 1-17

Enhanced WSD 8-32, 11-27

Enhanced WSD (SSL) 8-33

Enter key 2-19

Entry

File Name 6-29

Subject 6-36

Envelope Stack Guide 3-10

Environment 1-3

Error Clear Timer 8-41

Error Handling 8-19

Expansion Memory 11-5

Favorites 5-8

Editing and Deleting 5-12

Recalling 5-11

Registering 5-9

FAX 8-24

FAX Kit 11-4

File

Format 6-33

PDF 6-34

Separation 6-36

File Format 6-33

Default 8-16

File Management Utility Connection 5-31

File Name Entry 6-29

Default 8-17

File Separation 6-36

Default 8-16

Finisher Tray 2-5

First Copy Time 11-21

First Print Time 11-21

Front Cover 2-2

FTP 11-27

FTP Client (Transmission)

Protocol Detail 8-31

FTP Encrypted TX 6-37

Default 8-17

FTP Server (Reception)

Protocol Detail 8-31

Function Defaults 8-16

Index-3

Function Key Usage 8-22

Glossary 11-26

Google Cloud Print 4-9

GPL/LGPL 1-11

Grayscale 11-27

Group Authorization Set. 9-17

Group Authorization 9-17

Group List 9-18

Group Authorization Settings 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. 9-20

Guest Authorization 9-20

Guest Property 9-21

Guides Provided with the Machine xvii

Handles 2-2

Help 11-27

Help Screen 2-20

High Compression PDF 6-33

Default 8-17

Home 8-22

Customize Desktop 2-13

Customize Task Screen 2-13

Wallpaper 2-13

Home Screen 2-12

Host Name 8-29

HTTP

Protocol Detail 8-31

HTTPS

Protocol Detail 8-31

Hue Adjustment 6-20

Image Quality 6-33

Default 8-17

Inner Finisher 10-62

Inner Tray 2-2

Install

Macintosh 2-38

Software 2-30

Windows 2-31

Interface Block Setting 8-37

Internet 8-25

Proxy 8-25, 8-34

IP Address 11-27

Settings 8-29

IPP 11-28

Protocol Detail 8-31

IPP over SSL

Protocol Detail 8-31

IPSec

Settings 8-33

Job

Available Status 7-2

Canceling 7-10

Checking History 7-8

Checking Status 7-2

Detailed Information 7-7

Detailed Information of Histories 7-9

Details of the Status Screens 7-3

Displaying History Screen 7-9

Displaying Status Screens 7-2

Pause and Resumption 7-10

Sending the Log History 7-9

Job Accounting 9-31

Adding an Account 9-34

Counting the Number of Pages Printed 9-43

Default Setting 9-42

Deleting an Account 9-37

Editing an Account 9-36

Enabling Job Accounting 9-32

FAX Driver 9-41

Job Accounting Access 9-33

Logout 9-45

Overview of Job Accounting 9-31

Print Accounting Report 9-44

Printing 9-38

Restricting the Use of the Machine 9-35

TWAIN 9-39

WIA 9-40

Job Box 11-28

Deletion of Job Retention 8-24

Private Print Box 4-11

Proof and Hold Box 4-14

Quick Copy Box 4-13

Quick Copy Job Retention 8-24

Specifying the Job Box from a Computer and Storing

the Job 4-10

Storage Media 8-24

Stored Job Box 4-12

Job Finish Notice 6-29

Job Separator 11-4

Job Separator Tray 2-5

JPEG/TIFF Print 6-39

Default 8-17

Keyboard Layout 8-20

Knopflerfish License 1-13

KPDL 11-28

Label 11-16

LAN Cable 2-6

Connecting 2-7

LAN Interface 8-33

Language 8-5

Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet) 11-4

Laser Scanner Cleaning 8-43, 10-40

Index-4

LDAP

Protocol Detail 8-31

Legal Information 1-10

Legal Restriction on Copying 1-9

Legal Restriction on Scanning 1-9

Loading Originals 5-2

Loading Originals in the Document Processor 5-3

Placing Originals on the Platen 5-2

Local Authorization 9-16

Logout 2-22

Low Toner Alert Level 8-20

LPD

Protocol Detail 8-31

Mailbox 2-5, 11-4

Management 9-1

Manual Setting (IPv6) 8-30

Measurement 8-20

Media Type Setting 8-15

Mixed Size Originals 6-12

Mixed Size Stapling 6-14

Monotype Imaging License Agreement 1-12

Mopria 4-9

Multi Purpose Tray 2-2, 2-3, 11-28

Paper Size and Media Type 8-9

Multi Sending 5-32

NetBEUI 11-28

Protocol Detail 8-31

Network

Preparation 2-24

Settings 8-29

Network Interface 2-6

Network Interface (Send) 8-36

Network Interface Connector 2-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

Notice 1-2

One Touch Key

Adding 3-27

Editing and Deleting 3-28

OpenSSL License 1-11

Operation Panel 2-2

Option

Card Authentication Kit 11-5

Data Security Kit 11-5

Expansion Memory 11-5

Job Separator 11-4

Large Capacity Feeder (2,000-sheet) 11-4

Mailbox 11-4

Network Interface Kit 11-5

Overview 11-2

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) 11-4

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4

SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-5

SSD 11-5

ThinPrint Option 11-5

USB Keyboard 11-5

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

Option Interface Slot 2-4

Optional Applications 11-6

Optional Function 8-39

Optional Memory 8-38

Optional Network

Basic 8-35

Original

Auto Detect Original Size (DP) 8-11

Custom Original Size 8-11

Default Original Size 8-12

Settings 8-11

Original Eject Table 2-2

Original Image 6-16

Default 8-16

Original Orientation 6-11

Default 8-16

Original Settings 8-11

Original Size 6-9

Original Size Indicator Plates 2-2

Original SSLeay License 1-11

Original Stopper 2-2

Original Table 2-2

Original Width Guides 2-2

Outline font 11-28

Panel Reset Timer 8-40

Index-5

Paper

Checking the Remaining Amount of Paper 7-12

Appropriate Paper 11-12

Cassette 8-8

Custom Paper Size 8-13

Default Paper Source 8-14

Loading Cardstock 5-7

Loading Envelopes 5-7

Loading Paper 3-2

Loading Paper in the Cassettes 3-4

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray 3-9

Media for Auto 8-14

Media Type Setting 8-14

Multi Purpose Tray 8-9

Paper Settings 8-13

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-4

Size and Media Type 3-9, 8-8, 11-11

Special Paper 11-15

Special Paper Action 8-14

Specifications 11-11

Weight 8-15

Paper Feed Mode 8-27

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2) 11-4

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-4

Paper Jams 10-41

Bridge Unit 10-57

Cassette 1 10-43

Cassette 2 10-43

Cassette 3 (2000-sheet x 1) 10-46, 10-57

Cassette 3 (500-sheet x 2) 10-44

Cassette 4 (500-sheet x 2) 10-48

Document Processor 10-60

Inner Finisher 10-59

Jam Location Indicators 10-41

Mailbox 10-58

Multipurpose Tray 10-50

Paper Length Guide 2-3, 3-4

Paper Output 8-18

Paper Selection 6-10

Paper Settings 8-13

Paper Stopper 3-10

Paper Width Adjusting Tab 2-3

Paper Width Guide 2-3

Paper Width Guides 3-4

Part Names 2-2

PDF/A 6-33, 11-28

Default 8-17

Ping 8-34

Platen 2-2

POP3 11-28

POP3 (E-mail RX)

Protocol Detail 8-31

PostScript 11-28

Power Cable

Connecting 2-8

Power Management 1-16

Power Off 2-9

Power On 2-9

Power Switch 2-2

PPM 11-28

Precaution for Loading Paper 3-4

Precautions for Use 1-4

Preset Limit 8-18

Prevent Bleed-thru 6-23

Default 8-16

Print Settings 4-2, 4-8

Printer 8-26

Auto Cassette Change 8-28

Color Setting 8-26

Copies 8-26

CR Action 8-27

Duplex 8-26

EcoPrint 8-26

Emulation 8-26

Form Feed TimeOut 8-27

Gloss Mode 8-28

Job Name 8-27

LF Action 8-27

MP Tray Priority 8-27

Orientation 8-26

Override A4/Letter 8-26

Paper Feed Mode 8-27

Print setting 4-2

User Name 8-27

Wide A4 8-27

Printer Driver 11-29

Help 4-3

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB

Memory 5-48

Printing from PC 4-4

Printing Speed 11-21

Priority Override 6-30

Product Library xviii

Quick No. Search key 2-19

Quick Setup Wizard 2-28

Quiet Mode 6-30

Quiet Mode Settings 8-42

RA (Stateless) 11-29

Settings 8-30

RAM Disk 11-29

RAM Disk Setting 8-38

Raw Port

Protocol Detail 8-31

Recycled Paper 11-18

Regarding Trade Names 1-10

Regular Maintenance 10-2

Toner Container Replacement 10-4

Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-7

Report 8-5

Admin Report Settings 8-6

Report Print 8-5

Result Report Settings 8-6

Sending Log History 8-7

Index-6

Report Print

Accounting Report 8-6

Font List 8-5

Network Status 8-5

Optional Network Status 8-6

Service Status 8-6

Status Page 8-5

Resolution 6-36, 11-21

Resource Saving - Paper 1-16

Responding to Messages 10-20

Restart 8-37

Restart Network 8-34

Right Cover 1 2-3

Right Cover 1 Lever 2-3

Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2

Saturation 6-22

Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-50

Scan Resolution 6-36

Default 8-16

SD Card

Format 8-21

SD/SDHC Memory Card 11-5

Secure Protocol 8-33

Security Level 8-37

Send and Forward 8-23

Send as E-mail 5-20

Send Result Report 8-6

Send Settings 8-23

Color TIFF Compression 8-23

Default Screen 8-23

Dest. Check before Send 8-23

Entry Check for New Dest. 8-23

New Destination Entry 8-23

Recall Destination 8-23

Send and Forward 8-23

Send to Folder (FTP) 5-20

Send to Folder (SMB) 5-20

Sending 5-20

Preparation for Sending a Document to a PC 3-12

Sending Size 6-32

Service Setting 8-43

Setting Date and Time 2-23

Sharpness 6-21

Shortcuts 5-16

Adding 5-16

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts 5-17

Simple Login 2-22

Simple Login Settings

Simple Login 9-25

Simple Login Setup 9-25

Skip Blank Page 6-30

Sleep 2-26

Sleep Level 2-27, 8-41

Sleep Rules 2-27, 8-41

Sleep Timer 8-41

Slit Glass 2-2

SMB Client (Transmission)

Protocol Detail 8-31

SMTP 11-29

SMTP (E-mail TX)

Protocol Detail 8-31

SNMP

Protocol Detail 8-31

SNMPv3

Protocol Detail 8-31

Solving Malfunctions 10-13

Sound 8-10

Specifications 11-19

Copy Functions 11-21

Document Processor 11-22

Innner Finisher 11-24

Machine 11-19

Mailbox 11-24, 11-25

Paper Feeder (2,000-sheet) 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) 11-23

Paper Feeder (500-sheet) 11-23

Printer Functions 11-21

Scanner Functions 11-22

SSD 11-5

Format 8-21

SSD Initialization 8-39

SSL 8-33

Stack Level Adjuster 3-11

Staple Jam 10-62

Status Page 11-29

Status/Job Cancel 7-1

Storing Size 6-38

Subnet Mask 11-29

Settings 8-29

Supplies

Checking the Remaining Amount 7-12

Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose Tray 2-3

Symbols 1-2

System Menu 8-2

Address Book/One Touch 8-25

Adjustment/Maintenance 8-42

Application 8-24

Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-8

Common Settings 8-10

Copy 8-22

Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-40

Document Box 8-24

FAX 8-24

Home 2-12

Internet 8-25

Language 8-5

Operation Method 8-2

Printer 8-26

Quick Setup Wizard 2-28

Report 8-5

Send 8-23

System/Network 8-29

User Login/Job Accounting 8-26

User Property 8-7, 9-10

Index-7

System/Network 8-29

Data Security 8-39

Interface Block Setting 8-37

Network 8-29

Network Interface (Send) 8-36

Optional Function 8-39

Optional Memory 8-38

Optional Network 8-35

RAM Disk Setting 8-38

Restart 8-37

Security Level 8-37

Wireless Network 8-35

TCP/IP 11-29

Settings 8-29

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Settings 2-24, 8-29

TCP/IP (IPv6) 11-27

Settings 8-30

ThinPrint

Protocol Detail 8-32

ThinPrint Option 11-5

ThinPrint Over SSL

Protocol Detail 8-32

Time Zone 8-40

Tone Curve Adjustment 8-43

Toner Container (Black) 2-4

Toner Container (Cyan) 2-4

Toner Container (Magenta) 2-4

Toner Container (Yellow) 2-4

Toner Container Replacement 10-4

Touch Panel 2-12

Tray A 2-5

Troubleshooting 10-13

TWAIN 11-30

Setting TWAIN Driver 2-40

USB 11-30

USB Cable

Connecting 2-8

USB Interface 2-6

USB Interface Connector 2-4

USB Keyboard 11-5

USB Keyboard Type 8-20

USB Memory

Printing 5-48

Remove 5-51

Save 5-50

USB Memory Slot 2-2

User Login Administration 9-2

Adding a User 9-5

Changing User Properties 9-8

Enabling User Login Administration 9-3

FAX Driver 9-15

Group Authorization Settings 9-17

Guest Authorization Set. 9-20

ID Card Settings 9-28

Local Authentication 9-16

Logout 2-22

Obtain NW User Property 9-23

Overview of User Login Administration 9-2

Printing 9-12

Simple Login Settings 9-25

TWAIN 9-13

User Account Lockout Setting 9-4

WIA 9-14

User Login/Job Accounting 8-26

Job Accounting 9-31

Unknown ID Job 9-46

User Login 9-2

User Property 8-7

Waste Toner Box 2-4

Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-7

WIA 11-30

Setting WIA Driver 2-42

Wireless Network 8-35

Basic 8-35

Setup 8-35

Wireless Network Interface Kit 11-5

WSD Print 8-32

WSD Scan 5-29, 8-32

XPS Fit to Page 6-39

Default 8-17

Zoom 6-23

Default 8-17

KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.

Headquarters

225 Sand Road,

Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA

Phone: +1-973-808-8444

Fax: +1-973-882-6000

Latin America

8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100

Miami, Florida 33166, USA

Phone: +1-305-421-6640

Fax: +1-305-421-6666

KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.

6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,

Canada

Phone: +1-905-670-4425

Fax: +1-905-670-8116

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Mexico, S.A. de C.V.

Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco

Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,

Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México

Phone: +52-555-383-2741

Fax: +52-555-383-7804

KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.

Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás, Tamboré,

Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP 06543-306,

Brazil

Phone: +55-11-2424-5353

Fax: +55-11-2424-5304

KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA

Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile

Phone: +562-2350-7000

Fax: +562-2350-7150

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,

Australia

Phone: +61-2-9888-9999

Fax: +61-2-9888-9588

KYOCERA Document Solutions

New Zealand Ltd.

Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,

New Zealand

Phone: +64-9-415-4517

Fax: +64-9-415-4597

KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited

Unit 3 & 5, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen

Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-2496-5678

Fax: +852-2610-2063

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(China) Corporation

8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,

Shanghai,200003, China

Phone: +86-21-5301-1777

Fax: +86-21-5302-8300

KYOCERA Document Solutions

(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.

335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue, Bangkok

10800,

Thailand

Phone: +66-2-586-0333

Fax: +66-2-586-0278

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Singapore Pte. Ltd.

12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,

Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118

Phone: +65-6741-8733

Fax: +65-6748-3788

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Hong Kong Limited

Unit 1,2,4,6,8 & 10, 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak

Road Tsuen Wan, New Territories, Hong Kong

Phone: +852-3582-4000

Fax: +852-3185-1399

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Taiwan Corporation

6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,

Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.

Phone: +886-2-2507-6709

Fax: +886-2-2507-8432

KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.

18F Kang Nam Bldg, 396, Seocho-daero, Seocho-gu, Seoul,

Korea

Phone: +822-6933-4050

Fax: +822-747-0084

KYOCERA Document Solutions

India Private Limited

Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,

Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India

Phone: +91-0124-4671000

Fax: +91-0124-4671001

KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.

Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-654-0000

Fax: +31-20-653-1256

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.

Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,

The Netherlands

Phone: +31-20-5877200

Fax: +31-20-5877260

KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited

Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,

Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,

United Kingdom

Phone: +44-118-931-1500

Fax: +44-118-931-1108

KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.

Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,

Phone: +39-02-921791

Fax: +39-02-92179-600

KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.

Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,

Belgium

Phone: +32-2-7209270

Fax: +32-2-7208748

KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.

Espace Technologique de St Aubin

Route de I’Orme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,

France

Phone: +33-1-69852600

Fax: +33-1-69853409

KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.

Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,

28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain

Phone: +34-91-6318392

Fax: +34-91-6318219

KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy

Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,

Finland

Phone: +358-9-47805200

Fax: +358-9-47805390

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch

Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,

Switzerland

Phone: +41-44-9084949

Fax: +41-44-9084950

is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

KYOCERA Document Solutions

Deutschland GmbH

Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,

Germany

Phone: +49-2159-9180

Fax: +49-2159-918100

KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH

Altmannsdorferstraße 91, Stiege 1, 2. OG, Top 1, 1120, Wien,

Austria

Phone: +43-1-863380

Fax: +43-1-86338-400

KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB

Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden

Phone: +46-8-546-550-00

Fax: +46-8-546-550-10

KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf

Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway

Phone: +47-22-62-73-00

Fax: +47-22-62-72-00

KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S

Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,

Denmark

Phone: +45-70223880

Fax: +45-45765850

KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.

Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,

Portugal

Phone: +351-21-843-6780

Fax: +351-21-849-3312

KYOCERA Document Solutions

South Africa (Pty) Ltd.

KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,

90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa

Phone: +27-11-540-2600

Fax: +27-11-466-3050

KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.

Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,

Russia

Phone: +7(495)741-0004

Fax: +7(495)741-0018

KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East

Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,

Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,

United Arab Emirates

Phone: +971-04-433-0412

KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.

2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku

Osaka 540-8585, Japan

Phone: +81-6-6764-3555

http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com

Rev. 2 2016.05

2R4KDEN002